Operation/Reference Guide

TPDesign4
Touch Panel Design Program
(v2.11 or higher)

S of t w ar e

Last Revised: 9/22/2009

Software License and Warranty Agreement

LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment, exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software. TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed. PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES. LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE, including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory. LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.

This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) ...............................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1 What's New in Version 2.11...................................................................................... 1 Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements .............................................. 1
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................................................ 1 Supported Operating System Languages ...................................................................... 1 PC Requirements/Recommendations .............................................................................. 2

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions............................................................ 2

Supported Panel Types ................................................................................................... 2 Supported Screen Resolutions ........................................................................................ 3 Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4 ...................................................................... 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO ........................................................................ 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI ................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels ............................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels ............................................................ 5 Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels ........................................................................ 5 AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images ........................................... 6

True Type Font Support............................................................................................ 6 Supported Image File Types ..................................................................................... 6 Related Software Applications.................................................................................. 6
NetLinx Studio ................................................................................................................ 6 AMX WebUpdate ............................................................................................................ 7 G4 PanelBuilder .............................................................................................................. 7 G4 PanelPreview ............................................................................................................. 7

The TPDesign4 Work Area .................................................................................9

Overview .................................................................................................................. 9 Design View Windows ............................................................................................ 10
Design View Window tab controls ................................................................................ 11 Using the Zoom Controls .............................................................................................. 11 Magnifier Window......................................................................................................... 12

Workspace Window ................................................................................................ 12

Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab ................................................................................ 13 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 14

Properties Window ................................................................................................. 14

Properties Control - General Tab .................................................................................. 15 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 16 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 17

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Using the Apply To All option ....................................................................................... 18 Using the Prev and Next buttons .................................................................................. 18

State Manager window........................................................................................... 19

State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu ............................................................................ 20

Transfer Status Window.......................................................................................... 20 Status Bar ............................................................................................................... 21 Button Preview Window ......................................................................................... 22 Print Preview Window ............................................................................................ 23 Working With Dockable Windows .......................................................................... 23
Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows ....................................................... 23 Toggling the Windows .................................................................................................. 23

Using the New Project Wizard ..........................................................................25

Overview ................................................................................................................ 25 New Project Wizard dialogs.................................................................................... 26
New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog .............................................................................. 26 New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog.......................................................................... 27 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog......................................................................... 28

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) .................................................................................29

Overview ................................................................................................................ 29 Inappropriate File Name Characters ....................................................................... 29 Creating a New Project........................................................................................... 29 System-Generated Project File Names ................................................................... 30 Edit Focus ............................................................................................................... 31 Quick Input ............................................................................................................. 31 Undo/Redo ............................................................................................................. 32 Cutting, Copying and Pasting ................................................................................. 32 Using the Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 33 Working With Video Fills ........................................................................................ 33 Drag and Drop Support .......................................................................................... 34 Using G4 PanelPreview ........................................................................................... 34 Setting Project Properties ...................................................................................... 34
Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab....................................................... 35 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab ............................................... 37 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab ......................................................................... 38 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab ............................................. 39

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File ................................................ 40 Setting a Power Up Page........................................................................................ 41 Setting Power Up Popup Pages.............................................................................. 41

ii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Setting an Inactive Page Flip .................................................................................. 42 Using the Workspace Window ................................................................................ 43
Workspace Window - Pages Tab ................................................................................... 43 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 44 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window ........................................... 44

Using the Properties Window ................................................................................. 45

Properties Window - General Tab ................................................................................. 45 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 46 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 46

Working With Multiple Projects .............................................................................. 46

Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously.................................................................... 46 Copying/Pasting Across Projects................................................................................... 46

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)...................................... 47

Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 ..................................................................................... 47

R-4 Remote Controller Projects .............................................................................. 48

Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers .................................................... 48 R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types ........................................................ 49

R-4 Setup Codes ..................................................................................................... 49

Levels: .......................................................................................................................... 49 Addresses ..................................................................................................................... 49 External Button Options ............................................................................................... 50 R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes .............................................................. 50

Working With The Resource Manager ..............................................................51

Overview ................................................................................................................ 51 Working With Images ............................................................................................. 53
Resource Manager dialog - Images tab ......................................................................... 53 Static Image Files .......................................................................................................... 53 Supported Image File Types ......................................................................................... 54 Importing Image Files Into Your Project ....................................................................... 54

Working With Dynamic Images............................................................................... 56

Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab .......................................................... 56 Dynamic Images ............................................................................................................ 57 Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project ............................................................... 57 Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image .................................................... 58

DynaMo Dynamic Images .................................................................................... 60

Creating a DynaMo Image ............................................................................................ 60 Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager .................................... 61 Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images ...................................................... 62 Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images .................................................. 62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

iii

Table of Contents

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output........................................... 63

Network Path Information............................................................................................. 63 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis.................................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic .......................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek ............................................................. 65 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras .............................................................................. 65 DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image..................... 65

Working With Slots ................................................................................................. 68

Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab............................................................................. 68 Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions ............................................................ 69

Working With Icons................................................................................................. 70

Bitmaps vs. Icons ........................................................................................................... 70

Working With Sounds ............................................................................................. 71

Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab......................................................................... 71 Supported Sound File Types ......................................................................................... 72 Importing Sound Files To Your Project.......................................................................... 72

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory ...... 72 Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs ....................................... 73
Editing Image Files ........................................................................................................ 73 Editing Sound Files........................................................................................................ 73

Working With Pages .........................................................................................75

Overview ................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a New Page .............................................................................................. 75 Setting Page Properties.......................................................................................... 76
Setting General Properties: Pages ................................................................................ 76 Setting Programming Properties: Pages ....................................................................... 76 Setting States Properties: Pages ................................................................................... 76

Renaming a Page .................................................................................................... 77 Adding a Fill Color to a Page.................................................................................. 77 Adding a Bitmap to a Page..................................................................................... 78 Adding an Icon to a Page ....................................................................................... 79 Adding Text to a Page............................................................................................ 79 Displaying a Video Source on a Page ..................................................................... 81 Copying/Pasting Pages ........................................................................................... 81
Copying Pages .............................................................................................................. 81 Pasting Pages ................................................................................................................ 81

Deleting Pages From a Project ............................................................................... 81 Exporting Pages as Image Files .............................................................................. 82 Printing Pages......................................................................................................... 83

iv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Working With Popup Pages .............................................................................85

Overview ................................................................................................................ 85 Creating a Popup Page........................................................................................... 85 Using the Popup Draw Tool.................................................................................... 87 Setting Popup Page Properties .............................................................................. 88
Setting General Properties: Popup Pages..................................................................... 88 Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages............................................................ 89 Setting States Properties: Popup Pages ....................................................................... 89

Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages ............................................................... 90 Renaming a Popup Page......................................................................................... 90 Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page...................................................................... 90 Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page ......................................................................... 91 Adding an Icon to a Popup Page ............................................................................ 91 Adding Text to a Popup Page ................................................................................ 92 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page .......................................................... 93 Creating Popup Page Groups ................................................................................. 93 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages................................................................................ 94
Copying Popup Pages ................................................................................................... 94 Pasting Popup Pages..................................................................................................... 94

Deleting Popup Pages From a Project .................................................................... 94 Show/Hide Popup Pages ........................................................................................ 95

Working With Buttons ......................................................................................97

Overview ................................................................................................................ 97 Button Draw Tools .................................................................................................. 97 Drawing a Button.................................................................................................... 98 Generated Button Names ....................................................................................... 99 Specifying the Button Type .................................................................................. 100 Specifying a Button Border................................................................................... 100 Adding Text to a Button ....................................................................................... 100
Foreign Language Support for Text ............................................................................ 101

Adding a Fill Color To a Button ............................................................................ 102

Changing the Button Fill Color.................................................................................... 102

Adding a Bitmap to a Button ................................................................................ 103 Adding an Icon to a Button................................................................................... 104

Working With Transparent Backgrounds..................................................................... 106

Displaying a Video Source on a Button................................................................. 107 Adding Text Effects .............................................................................................. 107 Page Flips ............................................................................................................. 107

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Creating a Page Flip .................................................................................................... 108 Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips ................................................................................... 109 Page Flip Actions......................................................................................................... 109

Copying/Pasting Buttons ...................................................................................... 110

Copying Buttons.......................................................................................................... 110 Pasting Buttons ........................................................................................................... 110

Editing Button Properties ..................................................................................... 111

Editing Multiple Selections.......................................................................................... 111

General Buttons .................................................................................................... 112

Setting Properties: General Buttons ........................................................................... 112

Multi-State General Buttons ................................................................................. 113

Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons ......................................................... 113 Level Control Parameters ............................................................................................ 114

Bargraph Buttons.................................................................................................. 115 Multi-State Bargraph Buttons ............................................................................... 116

Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons....................................................... 116 Slider Types................................................................................................................. 117 Formatting Codes ....................................................................................................... 117 Creating a Custom Slider ............................................................................................ 118 Working With Touch Maps .......................................................................................... 120

Joystick Buttons.................................................................................................... 121

Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons ........................................................................... 121

Text Input Buttons ................................................................................................ 122

Input Mask Characters................................................................................................. 123 Input Mask Ranges ...................................................................................................... 123 Input Mask Next Field Characters ............................................................................... 123 Input Mask Operators ................................................................................................. 123

Computer Control Buttons ................................................................................... 124

Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons ........................................................... 124

TakeNote Buttons................................................................................................. 125

Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons ........................................................................ 125

Setting Default New Button Parameters .............................................................. 126 Using the Drawing Assist Features ....................................................................... 127
Order Assist toolbar .................................................................................................... 127 Position Assist toolbar................................................................................................. 127 Size Assist toolbar ....................................................................................................... 128

Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog .................................................................... 129 Previewing a Button ............................................................................................. 130 Creating a Date Button......................................................................................... 131

vi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Creating a Time Button......................................................................................... 132

Working With External Controls .....................................................................135

Overview .............................................................................................................. 135 External Button Options ....................................................................................... 135 Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels ....................................... 135 Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ................................................ 136
Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons ................................................... 136 Setting Global Properties for External LEDs ............................................................... 136

Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ..................................... 137

Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons................................ 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs ........................................... 138

Working With List Box Buttons ......................................................................139

Overview .............................................................................................................. 139 G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons ........................................................... 140 List Box Toolbar.................................................................................................... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode .................................................. 140 List Box Buttons: Managed Mode......................................................................... 141
Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) ............................................................... 141 Adding Rows ............................................................................................................... 142 Adding Columns.......................................................................................................... 143 Deleting Columns........................................................................................................ 143 Deleting Rows ............................................................................................................. 143 Cutting, Copying and Pasting a List Box ..................................................................... 144 List Box Buttons - Container Button............................................................................ 144 List Box Container Properties vs. Column Properties.................................................. 145 Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons........................................................... 145 Setting List Box Container Button Properties ............................................................. 146 List Box Buttons - Subordinate Buttons ...................................................................... 147 Subordinate Button Placement ................................................................................... 147 Subordinate Buttons - Drag and Drop Capability........................................................ 148 List Box Buttons - Columns.......................................................................................... 148 Setting Properties: List Box Columns .......................................................................... 148 Setting List Box Button Column Properties................................................................. 149

List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode .................................................................... 150

Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons ....................................................................... 151 Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) ........................................................... 152

List Box Buttons - Resizing.................................................................................... 153 List Box Buttons - Z-Order .................................................................................... 154
Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons ...................................................... 154

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

vii

Table of Contents

List Box Buttons - Navigation Buttons .................................................................. 154

Creating List Box Navigation Buttons ......................................................................... 155 Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar.................................................................... 156 Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar...................................................................... 157 Scroll Bar Components ................................................................................................ 157 Navigation Buttons - Channel Code Values ................................................................. 158

List Data Table ...................................................................................................... 158

List Data Table Properties ........................................................................................... 159 Static List Box Data ..................................................................................................... 159 Dynamic List Box Data................................................................................................. 159 Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button......................................................... 160

Creating a Static List Data Table........................................................................... 160

Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button ............................................... 163 Deleting a List Data Table ........................................................................................... 164

Creating a Dynamic List Data Table ...................................................................... 164

Data List Commands .................................................................................................. 164 Data List Command Rules............................................................................................ 166 Command Structure List View .................................................................................... 167 Dynamic List box Table Example ................................................................................. 169 Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button .......................................... 171 Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table .................................. 172

Working With Properties ................................................................................175

Overview .............................................................................................................. 175
Drag and Drop Support .............................................................................................. 175 Using the Apply To All option ..................................................................................... 176 Using the Prev and Next buttons ................................................................................ 176

Working With The Property Painter...................................................................... 177

Saving a Properties Set ............................................................................................... 178

General Properties................................................................................................ 179

Above Popups ............................................................................................................. 179 Animate Time Down .................................................................................................... 179 Animate Time Up......................................................................................................... 179 Auto-Repeat ................................................................................................................ 179 Border Style ................................................................................................................ 179 Color Depth................................................................................................................. 179 Column Display Order ................................................................................................. 179 Column Sort Order ...................................................................................................... 180 Compression................................................................................................................ 180 Cursor Color ................................................................................................................ 180 Cursor Name ............................................................................................................... 180

viii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Description.................................................................................................................. 180 Disabled ...................................................................................................................... 180 Display Type................................................................................................................ 180 Group .......................................................................................................................... 180 Height ......................................................................................................................... 181 Hidden ........................................................................................................................ 181 Hide Effect .................................................................................................................. 181 Hide Effect Time ......................................................................................................... 181 Hide Effect X/Y Pos..................................................................................................... 181 Input Mask .................................................................................................................. 181 Left.............................................................................................................................. 182 List Column ................................................................................................................. 182 List Column Padding ................................................................................................... 182 List Display .................................................................................................................. 182 List Table Port ............................................................................................................. 182 List Table Address....................................................................................................... 183 List Table Wrap ........................................................................................................... 183 List Filter Column ........................................................................................................ 183 List Managed............................................................................................................... 183 List Offset Enabled...................................................................................................... 183 List Preferred Row ...................................................................................................... 184 List Preferred Row Height........................................................................................... 184 List Row....................................................................................................................... 184 List Row Height ........................................................................................................... 184 List Row Padding......................................................................................................... 184 List Selectable ............................................................................................................. 184 Lock Button Name....................................................................................................... 185 Max Text Length ......................................................................................................... 185 Modal .......................................................................................................................... 185 Name........................................................................................................................... 185 Page Flip ..................................................................................................................... 185 Password ..................................................................................................................... 185 Password Character .................................................................................................... 185 Password Protection ................................................................................................... 185 Remote Host ............................................................................................................... 185 Remote Port................................................................................................................ 185 Reset Pos. On Show .................................................................................................... 186 Scale To Fit.................................................................................................................. 186 Show Effect ................................................................................................................. 186 Show Effect Time ........................................................................................................ 186

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

ix

Table of Contents

Show Effect X/Y Pos.................................................................................................... 186 Slider Color ................................................................................................................. 186 Slider Name................................................................................................................. 186 State Count ................................................................................................................. 186 TakeNote Enabled....................................................................................................... 187 TakeNote Host ............................................................................................................ 187 TakeNote Port............................................................................................................. 187 Timeout ....................................................................................................................... 187 Top .............................................................................................................................. 187 Touch Map................................................................................................................... 187 Touch Style.................................................................................................................. 187 Type ............................................................................................................................ 188 Value Direction............................................................................................................ 188 Width........................................................................................................................... 188

Programing Properties.......................................................................................... 189

Address Code.............................................................................................................. 189 Address Port ............................................................................................................... 189 Channel Code .............................................................................................................. 189 Channel Port................................................................................................................ 189 Command Output ....................................................................................................... 189 Command Port ............................................................................................................ 189 Feedback..................................................................................................................... 189 Level Aux..................................................................................................................... 189 Level Code .................................................................................................................. 190 Level Control Type ...................................................................................................... 190 Level Control Value ..................................................................................................... 190 Level Control Repeat Time .......................................................................................... 190 Level Function ............................................................................................................. 190 Level Port .................................................................................................................... 190 Range Aux Inverted..................................................................................................... 190 Range Drag Increment ................................................................................................ 191 Range Low................................................................................................................... 191 Range High.................................................................................................................. 191 Range Inverted ............................................................................................................ 191 Range Time Up ............................................................................................................ 191 Range Time Down ....................................................................................................... 191 String Output .............................................................................................................. 191 String Output Port ...................................................................................................... 191

State Properties.................................................................................................... 192

Bitmap......................................................................................................................... 192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Bitmap Justification..................................................................................................... 192 Bitmap X Offset .......................................................................................................... 192 Bitmap Y Offset........................................................................................................... 192 Border Color ............................................................................................................... 192 Border Name............................................................................................................... 192 Chameleon Image ....................................................................................................... 192 Draw Order ................................................................................................................. 193 Fill Color...................................................................................................................... 193 Font............................................................................................................................. 193 Icon Justification ......................................................................................................... 193 Icon Slot ...................................................................................................................... 193 Icon X Offset ............................................................................................................... 193 Icon Y Offset ............................................................................................................... 193 Marquee Direction ...................................................................................................... 194 Marquee Repeat ......................................................................................................... 194 Overall Opacity ........................................................................................................... 194 Scale Bitmap To Fit ..................................................................................................... 194 Sound .......................................................................................................................... 195 Streaming Source ........................................................................................................ 195 Text ............................................................................................................................. 195 Text Color ................................................................................................................... 195 Text Effect................................................................................................................... 195 Text Effect Color ......................................................................................................... 195 Text Justification ......................................................................................................... 195 Text X Offset............................................................................................................... 195 Text Y Offset............................................................................................................... 196 Video Cropping........................................................................................................... 196 Video Fill ..................................................................................................................... 196 Video Touch Pass-Thru ................................................................................................ 196 Word Wrap.................................................................................................................. 196

Using the All States Option .................................................................................. 196 Searching For Button Properties .......................................................................... 197 Searching and Replacing Button Properties ......................................................... 198

Working With States ......................................................................................201

Overview .............................................................................................................. 201 State Manager Window ........................................................................................ 201
State Manager Context Menu ..................................................................................... 201

Adding States To a Button ................................................................................... 202

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button ............................................................... 202 Adding States From the Clipboard ............................................................................. 203

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xi

Table of Contents

Drag & Drop To Add States ........................................................................................ 203

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button .................................................. 204 Removing States From A Button........................................................................... 204
Deleting States............................................................................................................ 204 Cutting States To the Clipboard.................................................................................. 205

Changing the Order Of States On A Button ......................................................... 205

Reordering States Through the Clipboard .................................................................. 205 Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop ................................................................ 205

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button .............................. 205

Copying a State to the Clipboard................................................................................ 205 Pasting a State from the Clipboard ............................................................................. 205

Draw Order (Z-Order) ........................................................................................... 206

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States............................................................ 206

Working With Function Codes ........................................................................207

Overview .............................................................................................................. 207 Show/Hide Function Codes................................................................................... 208 Function Codes - Limitations................................................................................. 208 Function Code Map .............................................................................................. 208 0- Setup Port......................................................................................................... 209 Using Power Assign .............................................................................................. 210
Clear Channels First..................................................................................................... 210 Assign Codes............................................................................................................... 210 Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) .......................................................................... 211 Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) ................................................. 211 Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign)............................................................................ 211

Working With Colors and Palettes ..................................................................213

Working With Colors............................................................................................. 213 Working With Palettes .......................................................................................... 215
Working With Multiple Color Palettes......................................................................... 215 Creating New Palette Entries ...................................................................................... 215 Creating Custom Palettes............................................................................................ 216 Renaming Palettes....................................................................................................... 216 Changing the Active Palette........................................................................................ 217 Importing Palette Files ................................................................................................ 217 Exporting Palette Files ................................................................................................ 217 Copying Palettes ......................................................................................................... 217 Copying Palette Entries............................................................................................... 217

Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder ................... 218 Using the Microsoft Paint Utility Program.......................................................... 218

xii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Working With Video Fills ................................................................................219

Overview .............................................................................................................. 219
Streaming Video Fills .................................................................................................. 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Page.......................................................................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page .............................................................. 220 Displaying a Video Source on a Button ....................................................................... 220

Working With Animation Effects ....................................................................223

Overview .............................................................................................................. 223 Using the Animation Wizard ................................................................................. 223
Animation Wizard - Select Type (Step 1 of 6).............................................................. 223 Animation Wizard - Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) ..................................................... 223 Animation Wizard - Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) ........................................................ 224 Animation Wizard - Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) ......................................................... 224 Animation Wizard - Appearance (Step 5 of 6) ............................................................. 225 Animation Wizard - Finish (Step 6 of 6) ....................................................................... 225

Tweening .............................................................................................................. 225 Creating Color Transition Effects .......................................................................... 226

Creating Animated Bitmap Effects.............................................................................. 227 Creating Animated Text Effects .................................................................................. 228 Tweeners sub-menu .................................................................................................... 228

Chameleon Images ............................................................................................... 229

Requirements for Chameleon Images ......................................................................... 229 Working With Chameleon Images ............................................................................... 230 Working With Chameleon Images - Example .............................................................. 230 Chameleon Images, Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder......................................... 231

File Transfer Operations .................................................................................233

Overview .............................................................................................................. 233 Secure NetLinx Connections ................................................................................. 233 Working With Communications Configurations .................................................... 234
Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations ................................................. 234 Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration............................. 235

Connecting to a NetLinx Master ........................................................................... 235

Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP ................................................................ 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port .......................................................... 236 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem............................................................... 237

Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master..................................... 238

Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master................................................................... 238 Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master ............................................................ 238 Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP .................................................................................... 238

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xiii

Table of Contents

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port .............................................................................. 239 Panel File Transfers via Modem................................................................................... 240 Transfer Options ......................................................................................................... 241

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers............................................................... 241

Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers.................. 241 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers .................................. 242 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP)................................................... 242

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection .................. 242
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 242 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 243

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers................................................................... 243

Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels.................................................... 243 Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers...................... 243 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers ...................................... 244 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB)....................................................... 244

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection ...................... 244
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 244 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 244

MVP-5200i USB Driver .......................................................................................... 245

Working With Templates ................................................................................247

Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files ............................................................ 247 Working With the System Page Template ............................................................ 247
Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project .................................................. 248 Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page ...................................... 249 Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads .................................................. 249 System Page Template Reference ............................................................................... 250 System Page Template Popup Pages .......................................................................... 251

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template........................................ 252 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements.................................. 254
Navigation Elements ................................................................................................... 254 Placeholder Elements .................................................................................................. 255

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements .................................. 256

Mode Elements ........................................................................................................... 256 Sub-Navigation Elements ............................................................................................ 257 Splash Elements .......................................................................................................... 257 Device Elements .......................................................................................................... 258 Feature Elements ........................................................................................................ 258 Sub-Feature Elements ................................................................................................. 259

xiv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template ................................................ 259 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions................................... 260 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions...................................... 261 Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template.......................................... 262
VA Templates - Navigations as Pages ......................................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements ....................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element.................................................................. 263 VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements ................................................ 263 VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements ............................................... 263

Program Preferences ......................................................................................265

Overview .............................................................................................................. 265 Preferences Dialog - Application tab .................................................................... 265
Startup ........................................................................................................................ 265 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 266 Warning Messages ...................................................................................................... 266

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab ................................................................... 267

Window ....................................................................................................................... 267 Grid ............................................................................................................................. 268 Transparency ............................................................................................................... 268

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab..................................................................... 269

Default Directories ...................................................................................................... 269

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab ............................................................. 270 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab .................................................................... 271
Undo / Redo Support .................................................................................................. 271

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files............................................ 272 Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files ........................................... 272 Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program .......................... 273 Customizing the Menus and Toolbars................................................................... 274 Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................................... 274
Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars.......................................................................... 274 Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars ................................................................. 275 Associating an Icon With a New Command................................................................. 275 Creating a New Custom Toolbar ................................................................................. 276 Renaming Custom Toolbars ........................................................................................ 276 Deleting Custom Toolbars........................................................................................... 277

Customizing the Menus ........................................................................................ 277

Adding Commands To Existing Menus........................................................................ 277 Removing Commands From Existing Menus ............................................................... 277 Creating a New Custom Menu .................................................................................... 278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xv

Table of Contents

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu ...................................... 279 Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) ......................................................................... 280
Setting Custom Hotkeys.............................................................................................. 280

xvi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Overview
The TPDesign4 (or "TPD4") Touch Panel Design program is designed to assist you in creating a state-of-theart touch panel interface for AMX's G4 Level touch panels (including the Modero line, MIO-R4 remote controllers, and the NXP-TPI/4 Touch Panel Interface). Use TPD4 to create Project Files (*.TP4) containing all of the information required to define a user-interface to be utilized on a G4 touch panel. This includes Pages, Popup Pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, as well as buttons (including function code information), and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design (including dynamic images and video feeds).

What's New in Version 2.11

Support for Dynamo Resource Images on the following panel-types: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements

Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000 (service pack 4 or greater) Windows XP Professional (service pack 2 or greater) Windows Vista-Business You must have Power User (or Administrator) rights to install and run all required System files.

Supported Operating System Languages

Windows XP Professional / Windows 2000: English (US) French German Spanish Windows Vista-Business: Chinese (Classic, HK) French Japanese Spanish English Chinese (Simplified, PRC) Arabic German Turkish Greek Italian Portuguese Flemish (Dutch) Russian Turkish

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

PC Requirements/Recommendations
Pentium III 750MHZ processor (minimum requirement); 1.5GHz or faster recommended. 700 MB of free disk space (minimum requirement) 512 MB of RAM (minimum - SQL Server 2005 Express Edition requires 512MB) Minimum (VGA) screen resolution of 800x600. Windows-compatible mouse (or other pointing device). If the mouse wheel on your Microsoft IntelliMouse doesn't work with VA, try downloading the latest IntelliMouse drivers from Microsoft.

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions

Supported Panel Types
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) supports the following AMX (G4) touch panel types: Supported Panel Types
Name MVP-5100 MVP-5150 MVP-5200i MVP-7500 MVP-8400 MVP-8400i NXD-430 NXD-435 NXD-CV5 NXD-500i NXD/NXT-CV7 NXD-700vi NXD/NXT-CV10 NXT-CV10/PB NXD-1000vi NXD/NXT-CA12 NXD/NXT-CV12 NXD/NXT-1200V Description 5.2" Modero ViewPoint IR Touch Panel 5.2" Modero ViewPoint Wi-Fi Touch Panel 5.2" Modero ViewPoint Touch Panel with Intercom 7.5" Modero ViewPoint Touch Panel 8.4" Modero ViewPoint Touch Panel 8.4" Modero ViewPoint Touch Panel with Intercom 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 10" Modero Table Top Touch Panel with Pushbuttons 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels 12" Modero Video Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG5966-08) (FG5966-07) (FG5966-01) (FG5965-01) (FG5965-05) (FG5965-04) (FG2262-01) (FG2262-03) (FG2261-01) (FG2261-02) (FG2258-02K, FG2258-01K) (FG2258-04K) (FG2259-02K, FG2259-01K) (FG2259-03K) (FG2259-04K) (FG2251-10, FG2250) (FG2251-12K, FG2250-11K) (FG2251-60K, FG2250-60K) (FG225161RGB, FG2250-61V)

NXD/NXT-1200VG 12" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels with RGB

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types (Cont.)

Name NXD/NXT-CA15 NXD/NXT-CV15 Description 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG2253-10, FG2252) (FG2253-12K, FG2252-11K) (FG2253-61V, FG2252-61V) (FG2256K, FG2257K) (FG2256-61V, FG2257-61V) (FG630-100) (FG2275-01) (FG2275-102, FG2275-104) (FG2275-112, FG2275-114) (FG148-04)

NXD/NXT-1500VG 15" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXD/NXT-CV17 17" Flush Mount & Table Top Color Video Touch Panels

NXD/NXT-1700VG 17" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXP-PLV NXP-TPI/4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI R-4 Modero PosiTrack Pilot Camera Controller NetLinx Touch Panel Interface Total Presentation Interface, 2/4 Source Input Total Presentation Interface with DVI, 2/4 Source Input Mio R-4 Remote

The prefix " NXT" indicates the table-top (tilt) model, and "NXD" represents the wallmount version.

Supported Screen Resolutions

While most touch panels support a single screen resolution, the NXI-TPI/4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI and NXV-300 support multiple resolutions, selectable in the New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog. The screen resolution setting for these panel devices can be changed later via the Screen Size option in the Save As Different Panel Type dialog. Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions
Resolution 640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x480 MVP-7500 NXP-TPI4 TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO-DVI MVP-5150 MVP-5200i CV5 MVP-8400i MVP-8400 800x600 1200V 1200VG 1500VG 1024x768 CV15 CA15 CV7 CV10 CV10/PB CA12 CV12 NXP-TPI4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI NXP-TPI4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions (Cont.)

Resolution 1280x720 VESA/CEA 1280x768 TPI-PRO-DVI 1700VG CV17 NXP-TPI4 1280x1024 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1080 VESA/CEA 1920x1200 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type

TPD4 provides scrolling if a Design View is larger than the available visible work area.

Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4

TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the NXI-TPI/4 (NetLinx Touch Panel Interface 4):
640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024

Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO

TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface - Pro Edition (2/4 Source Input)):
640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface PRO with DVI (2/4 Source Input)):
640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x600 1024x768 1280x720 VESA 1280x720 CEA 1280x768 1280x1024 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 VESA 1920x1080 CEA 1920x1200

Video Capabilities for Modero Panels

Video Capable Modero Panels all support Composite video inputs. These include: NXT/NXD-CV7 NXD/NXT-CV10 NXD/NXT-CV10/PB NXT/NXD-CV12 NXT/NXD-CV15 NXT/NXD-CV17

Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels

Video capable Enhanced Modero Panels all support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video inputs. These include: NXT/NXD-1200V (Composite only) NXT/NXD-1200VG NXT/NXD-1500VG NXT/NXD-1700VG While the NXT/NXD-1200V panel is considered to be part of the enhanced Modero family of Panels, it also supports Composite video (only).

Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels

Intercom-equipped Modero Panels support 2-way full-duplex intercom capabilities. These panels include: MVP-5200i MVP-8400i NXD-1000vi NXD-700vi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images

The following list indicates the AMX Touch Panels that support Dynamo Resource Images (at the time of this TPDesign4 release). This list will be updated as support for Dynamo Resource Images is added to new and existing panels: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

True Type Font Support

Since G4 panels have the ability to decode and display Windows True Type Font files (TTF), TPD4 directly utilizes TTF files. Fonts are presented in the Properties Control window (States tab), as well as the Button Selection/Draw toolbar and the Add Page and Add Popup Page dialogs. The TTF files listed represent those TTF files installed in Windows with their available point sizes.

Supported Image File Types

TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4, only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4, the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Unless you are actually using transparency, JPGs are recommended over PNGs, since they are usually slightly smaller in size. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details.

Related Software Applications

The related AMX software applications described in the following sections are available to download from www.amx.com:

NetLinx Studio
NetLinx Studio is a full featured Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for NetLinx and Axcess Control Systems. NetLinx Studio is available for free download from www.amx.com. Refer to the NetLinx Studio online help and Instruction Manual for instructions.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

AMX WebUpdate
The AMX WebUpdate program is a stand-alone application that communicates with the AMX website, allows a user to select from a list of available AMX Software programs to choose for updating, determines the latest version of the selected applications, returns a listing of available updates, allows a user to download the selected installation files, and upon request, launches the installation of those downloads. Note: The WebUpdate application is not installed by TPD4, and must be installed separately. If not found, TPD4 will prompt you to download the application from www.amx.com. Select Help > Web Update to launch this application. Refer to the WebUpdate on-line help for details and instructions.

G4 PanelBuilder
G4 PanelBuilder is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to quickly create TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels, using either pre-fabricated templates from AMX, or user-designed templates. The G4 PanelBuilder application is designed to do the bulk of the basic layout and navigational design of a touch panel design. TPD4 is required to complete the project by specifying channel mapping information, and to generally fine-tune the project as needed. Although G4 PanelBuilder is installed separately, it is fully integrated with TPD4. For example, the File > New From G4 PanelBuilder option (available only if G4 PanelBuilder is installed) launches the G4 PanelBuilder application to allow you to create a new TPD4 project. Use the set of options in the File menu to access the key functions of the G4 PanelBuilder application: Click File > New From G4 Panel Builder to create a new TP4 panel project using G4 PanelBuilder. Click File > Import Touch Panel Template to import an existing PanelBuilder (*.TPT) or Visual Architect template file (*.VAT) into TPD4 as a starting point for your panel design. Click File > Export G4 PanelBuilder Template to export the active TP4 project as a PanelBuilder Template file (*.TPT). For details on using G4 PanelBuilder to generate G4 PanelBuilder project files (*.PB4), refer to the G4 PanelBuilder online help.

G4 PanelPreview
G4 PanelPreview is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to preview TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. To preview your panel project, select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application, where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons, (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www.amx.com, and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Overview
The TPD4 work area consists of several main components (FIG. 1):
Title Bar

Menu Bar Toolbars

Workspace Window

Design View Windows

Properties Window

State Manager Window

Status Bar FIG. 1 TPDesign4 Work Area

In its default configuration, from top to bottom, left to right, the main components are: Title Bar - Lists the name of the active Project file. Menu Bar - Contains the main menu options (File, Edit, Panel, Page, Button, States, Layout, Transfer, View, Tools, Window, and Help). Toolbars - You can choose which toolbars to show in the workspace via the View > Toolbars submenu. Click View, then click in the checkboxes to select/de-select the listed toolbars (including custom toolbars). If a toolbar has a check next to it in the sub-menu, then it is displayed. These settings are saved, so they'll apply the next time the application is launched. Design View Windows - Each tabbed Design View Window represents a Touch Panel page or popup page. Note that a MDI tab is displayed for each opened page. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. When this option is enabled, a tab is displayed for each open page. These tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area, but can be moved, toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). Workspace Window - Contains two tabs: The Pages tab contains a tree structure representing all open projects, and their pages and popup pages. Use the Pages tabs to open/edit the pages / popup pages in each project. The Function Maps tab allows you to view/edit the function codes associated with each page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Properties Window - Contains three tabs: the General tab allows you to view/edit general (non-state oriented) button properties, the Programming tab allows you view/edit programming-oriented properties, and the States tab allows you to view/edit button state information. State Manager Window - Displays each state of the selected button as a thumbnail image in this window. The State Manager window allows you to view/edit the various states of a selected button. Status Bar - By default, the Status Bar shows the current XY cursor position, and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code, Address code, Level code, button size, panel revision, Feedback and Initial page file target information. The status bar also indicates the status of your connection to the NetLinx Master.

Design View Windows

Design View windows (FIG. 2) represent pages or popup pages in the panel file you are creating. They provide a canvas upon which you may place buttons of any size that will fit within the confines of the windows.

FIG. 2 Design View windows

The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area, but can be moved, toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). Since Design View windows represent the pages on the panel themselves, Design Views that represent pages are not resizable. Use the Zoom and Magnifier Window features to control the size of the view. Popup pages are resizable through the Properties Window by adjusting their Left, Top, Width or Height properties. Alternatively, you can set their size and dimensions manually by first enabling the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. Once the Popup is displayed on the page, you can click and drag to resize and position it manually. Select the Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (in the View toolbar) to display function codes associated with each button (FIG. 3).

FIG. 3 Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (View toolbar)

Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. When this option is enabled, a tab is displayed for each open page. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area, but can be moved, toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs).

10

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. If you open more than 15 pages, only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). No data will be lost, only the view is closed. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. Select Display from the Design View context menu to access the Display sub-menu, containing options that allow you to select which state of a selected button to display in the Design View. Select Layout from the Design View context menu to access the Layout sub-menu, containing options for layout/design control (send to front/back, align, center, etc). This menu is identical to the Layout menu, accessible from the main menu bar. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools.

Design View Window tab controls

Each panel page that you open is shown in its own Design View window for editing. By default, each of these windows has its own page tab (normally appearing along the bottom edge of the Design View window area) that shows the Page name. Use these tabs to easily flip from page to page, once you have several pages open. TPD4 displays up to a maximum of 10 page tabs. If you open more than 10 pages, the tabs automatically disappear. In TPD4, these page tabs are referred to as "MDI tabs", and they can be toggled on/off via the View > MDI Page Tabs option.

Right-click inside any of the page tabs to access the MDI Page tabs context menu.

Using the Zoom Controls

The Zoom toolbar (FIG. 4) contains shortcuts to the main Zoom Controls. Use these options to control the zoom factor on the selected page or popup page. Zoom controls do not affect the actual size of the selected object, only the way it is represented in the workspace area.

FIG. 4 Zoom toolbar

The following Zoom Controls are available via the Zoom toolbar: Full Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to show the entire page at 100% size. Fit Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to fit inside the Design View window. Actual Size: Automatically adjusts the zoom to represent how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the target panel type. To use this option, you must first specify the monitors visible size (in the Monitor Size field of the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog). The monitor size should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a full-screen image, as opposed to the monitors overall diagonal size. For example, most 21 monitors typically have between a 19.5 and 20 viewable area. Zoom Out/In: With a page or popup page selected, click the Zoom Out and Zoom In toolbar buttons to adjust the display size of the selected object, by the increments listed in the Zoom Control drop-down.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

11

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Zoom Control Drop-down: Click the down-arrow to open the Zoom control options list. Use this list to manually set the zoom to by incremental percentages (25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200% or 400%), or by Fit Page, For Width or Fit Height. Additional Zoom options are available via the Window > Zoom submenu: Fit Width: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the width of the selected object inside the Design View window. Fit Height: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the height of the selected object inside the Design View window. Custom: Opens the Custom Window Zoom dialog, where you can specify any zoom percentage within the range of 25 - 400% (in 1-percent increments).

Magnifier Window
The Magnifier window allows you to magnify a given area of a design view for temporary viewing in a separate floating window, without zooming the entire design view. Select View > Magnifier Window (or click the toolbar button) to access the Magnifier Window.

FIG. 5 Magnifier Window toolbar button (View toolbar)

Right-click inside the Magnifier window to access the Magnify Control context menu, where you can select a zoom factor from 2 to 8 times actual size. This floating window is resizable and dockable.

Workspace Window
The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus), and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. 6):

FIG. 6 Workspace window

12

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab

Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project, in the Workspace Navigator. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. Each open Project is represented by a folder, each one with a different colored panel icon (FIG. 7):

FIG. 7 Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab

Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. Click the + symbol next to the folders, or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders, one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. These folders represent Popup Page Groups, and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time, and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

13

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab

Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes, Address codes, Level codes, String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file, displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window (FIG. 8).

FIG. 8 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab

This list is sorted by Port, and within Port by Code.

Properties Window
The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page, popup page and button properties, and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace, the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below, the selected button is named "pause", and the button type is general. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button, and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General, Programming and States:

14

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Properties Control - General Tab

Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types (FIG. 9). The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type (in this case, General buttons).

FIG. 9 Properties Control - General Tab

To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right column to activate that field for editing. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page, or the Page itself). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column, and drag it to another field. When you release the mouse button, the value is copied to the new location. With an item selected, the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value, and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field, TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog, and the original value is left unchanged.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

15

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Properties Control - Programming Tab

Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button (FIG. 10). This information is displayed in a table format, similar to the General tab.

FIG. 10 Properties Control - Programming Tab

To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page, or the Page itself). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column, and drag it to another field. When you release the mouse button, the value is copied to the new location. With an item selected, the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value, and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field, TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog, and the original value is left unchanged.

16

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Properties Control - States Tab

Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button (FIG. 11). This information is displayed in a table format, similar to the General tab. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button.

FIG. 11 Properties Control - States Tab

To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page, or the Page itself). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column, and drag it to another field. When you release the mouse button, the value is copied to the new location. With an item selected, the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value, and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field, TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog, and the original value is left unchanged. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels), meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0, 0.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

17

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Using the Apply To All option

The Apply To All toggle button is located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (FIG. 12). Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously.

FIG. 12 Apply To All toggle button

If the Apply To All button is not depressed, and you select more than one button to act on, the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected, only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on, the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons, provided that the change can be applied to them all. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others, you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections, but not on multiple states for a single button. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states, select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once, use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button).

Using the Prev and Next buttons

The Prev and Next buttons, located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page, and the Apply To All button is not depressed (in its active state). These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. When you have multiple buttons selected, only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus.

18

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

State Manager window

The State Manager is typically located along the bottom edge of the screen (although it is a dockable window and you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit the various states of a selected button (FIG. 13). Each state of the selected button is displayed as a thumbnail image in this window. To display the State Manager window, select View > State Manager.

FIG. 13 State Manager window

The State Manager interacts with the Properties Control window to allow the visual aspects of a page, popup page or button to be set. Select a Page, Popup page or button to view the state or states associated with it. Double-click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to view/edit the properties for the selected state, in the Properties Control window (States tab). The State Manager window allows the viewing and modification of individual states, and supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities. Right mouse click on any thumbnail to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-General buttons, the different states (up to 256) are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up in the States tab), and back again to Off (Range Time Down in the States tab). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. The user will be able to set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number provided it is not a level type button. Note that because the thumbnails displayed in the State Manager window are scaled versions of the button images, some visual distortion may occur. This is only a result of the scaling, and does not represent distortion on the button itself. Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

19

The TPDesign4 Work Area

State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu

To access the State Manager Drag-and-Drop menu, select a button state (thumbnail view), and hold the mouse button down while dragging the selected state to another location in the State Manager window. The contents of the Drag-and-Drop menu change depending on the type of button selected: For Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph Buttons: A left mouse button drag-and-drop over a state executes a replace operation. A left mouse button drag-and-drop between states, prior to the first state, or after the last state executes a move operation, unless all states have been selected. A right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state presents a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Copy over", "Insert copy", "Move", or "Cancel". A right mouse button drag-and-drop between states, prior to the first state, or after the last state will present a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Insert copy", "Move", or "Cancel". For all other button types: A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state will execute a replace operation. A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop between states, prior to the first state, or after the last state is disallowed.

Transfer Status Window

The Send To Panel and Receive From Panel dialogs place the requested transfer into a queue, the status of which is displayed in the Transfer Status window, which may be docked/undocked from the main application window (FIG. 14).

FIG. 14 Transfer Status Window

This window displays the following data for each transfer: Status - The status bars indicate the progress of each file in the transfer, and the overall status of the transfer. Device - This column gives the Device # and a description of the target/source device. Project - This column indicates the name of the Project to which the files belong. Right mouse click anywhere in the Transfer Status Window to open the Transfer Status context menu, containing options for establishing a connection to the NetLinx Master and panels, and for transferring TP4 files to the panels. Note that this context menu is identical to the Transfer Menu, accessible through the main menu bar:

20

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Status Bar
There are two views available for the status bar (located along the bottom edge of the application window). The default view, and the secondary view which is available via a double-click anywhere inside the status bar. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels), meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0, 0. In the default view, it shows the current Cursor position, and (for the button the mouse is over): Location, Size, and Feedback (FIG. 15):

FIG. 15 Status Bar - default view

Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. Loc: Displays the X-Y location of the button that the cursor is over (relative to the upper-left corner of the button). Size: Displays the size of the button that the cursor is over. FbBk: Displays the type of feedback associated with the button that the cursor is over. Double-click anywhere on the status bar to view this secondary position. In the secondary view, it shows the current Cursor position, and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code, Address code and Level code (FIG. 16):

FIG. 16 Status Bar - secondary view

Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. Ch: Displays the Channel code (port number:channel code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. Add: Displays the Address code (port number:address code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. Lvl: Displays the Level code (port number:level code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. The Status Bar also indicates connection status as follows (FIG. 17):
not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. 17 Status Bar - connection status

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

21

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Button Preview Window

Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. 18).

Disable Mute Push FIG. 18 Button Preview window

The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. Click on the button in the Button Preview window to "push" the button in an identical fashion to utilizing the Push command button.

Button Preview is not available for Joystick or Listbox Buttons.

This window includes three command buttons: Click the Disable button to disable the button preview, but not close the Button Preview window. Click again to enable the preview. Click to Mute any sounds associated with this button. Click the Push button to simulate a push on the selected button. This allows you to visually preview the On/Off states (and all states in between, for multi-state buttons). Right-click inside the preview area of the Button Preview window to access the Button Preview context menu. Like the other windows in TPD4, the Button Preview window is fully dockable, but initially it opens undocked. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window.

22

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

The TPDesign4 Work Area

Print Preview Window

Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project, as they will appear when printed. Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. The printed output maintains a constant scaling factor across all pages, with the image centered on the printed page. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print - Prints the current page view Next Page - Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page - Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page - Toggles the page view to one or two pages. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. Zoom In - Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out - Zooms out from the page view Close - Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC, the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer.

Working With Dockable Windows

All windows in TPD4 are fully dockable. Dockable windows can be re-arranged within the application window. They automatically snap to the top, bottom, right or left side of the application window, or along the edges of other docked windows. To dock/undock a window, double-click inside the window's title bar. The dockable windows in TPD4 are: Design View Properties Control Workspace Navigator State Manager Transfer Status Window Button Preview Magnifier Window

Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows

To move the windows, click on the title bar and drag and drop the window into place. Dockable windows automatically snap into place once they are positioned near an available docking area (along the edges of the application window, or along the edge of another dockable window. To dock these windows, drag the window to reposition it next to any border or window frame and the window will automatically snap to the nearest border. To stretch the windows, click on any border and drag the border either vertically or horizontally. To resize the windows, click on the bottom-left corner of the window border in the area shaded with parallel diagonal lines and drag the corner in any direction.

Toggling the Windows

Each of the dockable windows (Design View, Properties Control, Workspace Navigator, State Manager and Button Preview windows) can be toggled on/off via the options in the View menu. Select or de-select each window to toggle by checking or un-checking the window listings in this menu (checked = window is on/ displayed).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

23

The TPDesign4 Work Area

24

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Using the New Project Wizard

Using the New Project Wizard

Overview
The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file), complete with a start page. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. To launch the New Project Wizard, select File > New. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process, click Cancel. The New Project Wizard is by its nature self-explanatory and intuitive, and consists of up to three dialogs:

1. The first dialog to appear (New Project Wizard - Step 1) contains fields to allow you set up the basics of
your new project. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. Job Name: Enter a name for the new project. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. Resolution: Click the down-arrow to select the target resolution for the project. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. Click Finish to close the wizard. If you close the wizard after step 1, you will have created a project with a single page. Every project created will have at least one page. You can add pages manually via the Panel > Add Page command.

2. The next dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard - Step 2) contains fields for System-Generated File
Names. If the Use System Generated File Names option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected, this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields, they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. DealerID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. SalesOrder: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. PurchaseOrder: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. FileRevision: Enter the Revision in this field. JobComments: Enter any project-related comments in this field.

3. The last dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard - Final Step) contains fields for setting up the initial
touch panel page in the project. Fill out this information and click Finish to exit the New Project Wizard. Name: Enter a name for the page. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog, where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font, from a list of all available fonts on your PC. FontSize: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. When you finish the New Project Wizard, note that the new project appears in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). The initial page is listed under the Pages folder, and has the edit focus. You can change the target panel type for any existing panel file via the File > Save as Different Panel Type option.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

25

Using the New Project Wizard

New Project Wizard dialogs

The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file), complete with a start page. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. To launch the New Project Wizard, select File > New. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process, click Cancel. The New Project Wizard consists of up to three dialogs:

1. New Project Wizard - Step One dialog 2. New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog 3. New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog
To launch the New Project Wizard (to create a new TPD4 Project), select File > New. This invokes the first of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. 19).

FIG. 19 New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog

The options in this dialog include: Job Name: Enter a name for the new project. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. External Button Options: MIO-R4 remotes support multiple external button options, to support transport and Teletext keypads. Select the desired external button layout from the drop-down list (MIO R-4 only). The External Button Option selected here is represented in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog. Resolution: If the Panel Type selected supports multiple screen resolutions (such as the TPIs and NXV-300), click the down-arrow to select a target resolution for the project. If the selected panel type supports resolution extensions (VESA, CEA etc.), the extension is provided with the associated resolution (not all resolutions require an extension). Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. The External Button Options and Panel Resolution selections cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. To change either of these, use the Save As Different Panel Type option (File Menu)

26

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Using the New Project Wizard

New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog

Select Next in the New Project Wizard - Step One dialog to access the second of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. 20).

FIG. 20 New Project Wizard - Step 2 dialog

If the "Use System Generated File Names" option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected, this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. The options in this dialog include: Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. Dealer ID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. Sales Order: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Purchase Order: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. File Revision: Enter the File Revision identifier in this field. Job Comments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields, they will not be included in the System Generated File Name.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

27

Using the New Project Wizard

New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog

Select Next in the New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog to access the third of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. 21).

FIG. 21 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog

The options in this dialog allow you to set up the initial touch panel page in the project: Name: Enter a name for the page. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog, where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font, from a list of all available fonts on your PC. Font Size: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size.

28

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Overview
TP4 Project (or Panel) files are created in the folder specified in the application preferences, unless you explicitly choose to save them in another location. Project Files contain all of the information required to define the user-interface that is displayed on the touch panel, including pages and popup pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, buttons including function code information, and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design. Each page / popup page name must be unique within their respective panel files in order to be accepted by the program. All name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. When creating a new Project file, avoid using inappropriate file name characters. TPD4 has a limit of 59 characters for the project name/filename. If you try to save with a longer name, TPD4 will automatically truncate the name to 59 characters.

Inappropriate File Name Characters

Avoid using the following characters when naming TPD4 project files: Inappropriate File Name Characters
Vertical Bar Question Mark Asterisk Less Than Sign Greater Than Sign Forward Slash Back Slash Double Quotes Colon Period

| ? * < > / \ " : .

Creating a New Project

TPD4 includes a New Project Wizard, to quickly guide you through the process of setting up a new project. To launch the New Project Wizard, select File > New, or click the toolbar button. The New Project Wizard is designed to be simple and intuitive. Simply fill in the fields in each New Project Wizard dialog, and click Next to proceed to the next dialog. Click the Finish button in the last dialog in the wizard to close the wizard. At this point, the project is created with one generic page, and is ready for you to start adding pages, popup pages and buttons (including External Controls, if the selected panel type features external pushbuttons). Refer to the Using the New Project Wizard section on page 25 for details.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

29

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

System-Generated Project File Names

When you are creating a new Project, you are given the option to use System Generated File Names (in the New Project Wizard dialog). System-generated file names are generated automatically based on several fields that hold various types of project information (Designer, Dealer ID, Sales Order, Purchase Order, and Revision). When you utilize System-Generated File Names, the resulting filename for this project file consists of each of these entries separated by commas. These fields are all optional. If you leave any of the fields blank, they are simply omitted from the file name. For example, if all fields are filled in as shown in FIG. 22,

FIG. 22 New Project Wizard - Step 2 dialog (System-Generated File Names)

The resulting file name would be: "1234,My TP Project,5678-9876,rev a,Super-Dave Osborne.TP4" The Purchase Order field and the (optional) Job comments field are not incorporated into the generated filename. Use these fields to enter this additional information for this project. All information entered in this dialog can be viewed/edited at any time via the Panel Properties dialog. If you select not to use System-Generated File Names, the file name will match the Job Name entered in the first dialog of the New Project Wizard.

30

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Edit Focus
The page, popup page, or button(s) that are the target for change actions are said to have the Edit Focus. For pages and popup pages, edit focus is indicated in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) by a small arrow at the lower-left corner of the icon for the selected page or popup page. FIG. 23 shows that "Page 1" has the edit focus.

"Page 2" has current Edit Focus

FIG. 23 Page Edit Focus as Indicated In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab)

For buttons, edit focus is indicated in the Design View window with small red squares (with yellow outlines) on the edges of the selected button.

Button has Edit Focus

Button does not currently have Edit Focus

FIG. 24 Button Edit Focus as Indicated In the Design View windows

Buttons that do not currently have edit focus are displayed with selection handles that are black squares (with white outlines). The Cut, Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element which has the current edit focus. This means the last thing selected (not necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows) has the edit focus. For example, if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port", and you perform a "Copy", then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window, and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties window, you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field, since it is not a valid Address Port number - these errors are indicated by a TPD4 error dialog.

Quick Input
Select Quick Input from the Edit menu or Design View context menu to access the Quick Input sub-menu. The Quick Input setting determines how typing directly into a Design View or into the State Manager will be handled: Current Property - This setting redirects keyboard input to the currently selected property on the currently visible tab of the Properties Window (assuming one is selected). For example, if you select the Name property (in the General tab of the Properties control window), any time you select a button in the Design View, you can just type and press the Enter key to enter a new button name for the selected button.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

31

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

The result of the keystroke will depend on the property selected.

Text - This setting redirects keyboard input to the button Text property for all selected button states (in the States tab of the Properties Control window). For example, if you select several states on a Multi-State button (in the State Manager window), you can type and press the Enter key to enter new button text for the selected states. If no states are selected, text is will be applied to all states of the button selected in the Design View. Disabled - Disables the Quick Input option.

Undo/Redo
TPD4 supports full Undo / Redo functionality at the panel level. This means that each panel file that is open in the program maintains a separate undo/redo stack and manages this for the user. You may either click the Undo or Redo toolbar icons, or click Edit > Undo or Edit > Redo. Click the down-arrows to view a history list that lists up to 25 of the most recent actions. Click to select one or more actions to be undone/redone. The commands alter their text dynamically to indicate which action is next in the undo/redo list. Selecting either option will immediately undo/redo the last action. These actions are independent of any file saves, therefore you may undo past a save if you so desire. Once a panel file is closed, it's undo/redo stack is flushed and is no longer available. The following actions may be undone/redone: Button Property Changes Page / Popup Page Renames Button Deletions / Cuts Button Creations / Pastes Page / Popup Page Deletions / Cuts Page / Popup Page Creations / Pastes State Deletions / Cuts State Creations / Pastes Copying/Cutting/Pasting images and sounds

Cutting, Copying and Pasting

There are several items that can be cut, copied or pasted in TPD4. The ability to utilize these features effectively can greatly increase your productivity. Copying/Pasting Pages - see the Copying/Pasting Pages section on page 81 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages - see the Copying/Pasting Popup Pages section on page 94 Copying/Pasting Buttons - see the Copying/Pasting Buttons section on page 110 Copying/Pasting States - see the Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button section on page 205. The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons, bitmaps, even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. This means the last thing selected, which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows, has the edit focus. For instance, if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port", and you perform a "Copy", then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window, and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry).

32

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window, you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field, since it is not a valid Address Port number (these errors are indicated by an error dialog).

Using the Selection Tool

To activate the Selection tool, select Edit > Selection Tool, or click the toolbar button in the Selection/Button Draw Toolbar (FIG. 25).

FIG. 25 Selection Tool

Use the Selection tool to pick/select objects in the Design View window(s). You can also select multiple buttons, using any of the following techniques:

1. Left click on the remaining desired buttons while simultaneously depressing the Shift key on your
keyboard.

2. You may perform a marquis selection by holding down the left mouse button outside the boundaries of
the desired buttons and drawing a selection box around the desired buttons.

3. In the Properties Control window, you may turn the Apply To All toggle button (located at the bottom of
the Properties Control window) On, then individually select each desired button.

4. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey, or select
Edit > Select All from the main menu. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages, you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. When using the Selection Tool, hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). When using the Selection Tool, hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it, as opposed to clicking on the item. With an item selected in a Design View window, hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. To de-select a button, either select another button, or left-click on the background of the page or popup page.

Working With Video Fills

If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel, you can assign a "video fill" to a page, popup page or button. The NXP-TPI/4, TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodates up to four video source inputs, and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. See the Supported Panel Types section on page 2 for details.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

33

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Drag and Drop Support

Project Files: Drag and drop TPD4 project files (*.TP4) from a Windows Explorer window onto the TPD4 workspace to open the project. You can also drag and drop TPDesign3 (*.TPD) project files into the workspace, to open the file via the TPD Conversion Wizard. Popup Pages: Popup Pages can be dragged from the Pages tab and dropped on a Design View as an alternate method of displaying the Popup Page on the full sized Page.

Dragging a Popup Page onto another Popup Page is not supported.

Using G4 PanelPreview
To preview your panel project, select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application, where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons, (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www.amx.com, and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details.

Setting Project Properties

Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. This is a multi-tab dialog allowing you to view and edit the target touch panel's properties. Depending upon the panel selected, each panel will support all or part of the following properties at the panel level: Project Information tab: Includes basic project information such as Job Name, Designer, Dealer ID, Sales Order, Purchase Order, Revision, Creation Date, Revision Date, Last save date, Created with Build Number, File Name, Job Comments, the Use system generated filenames option and Protection options with Password fields. Panel Setup Information tab: Includes touch panel setup options including Refresh Frequency, Marquee Speed, Panel Strings (Startup, Wakeup and Sleep), Power-up and Inactivity Settings and Feedback Blink Rate. Sensors tab: Includes Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors, Motion Sensors, Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors. IR Emitters and Receivers tab: Includes Channel Port information for AMX IR Emitters, AMX IR Receivers and User (non-AMX) IR Emitters.

34

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab

Use the options in the Project Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit project information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. 26).

FIG. 26 Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab

The information in this tab was set up when the project was created, in the New Project Wizard. These items represent the various components of the System-Generated File Name. If the Use System-Generated File Names option was not selected, these fields will be blank. The options in this tab include: Job Name - This editable field displays the current Job Name associated with this project. Designer ID - This editable field displays the current Designer associated with this project. Dealer ID - This editable field displays the current Dealer ID (identifier) associated with this project. Sales Order - This editable field displays the current Sales Order (identifier) associated with this project. Purchase Order - This editable field displays the current Purchase Order (identifier) associated with this project. Created - This read-only field displays the creation date for this project, and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project. Modified - This read-only field displays the last date on which this project was saved (and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project). File Revision - This editable field displays the current Revision (identifier) associated with this project.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

35

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Revision Date - This read-only field displays the date of the current revision of this project. File Name - This read-only field displays the full path and disc filename of the project. Job Comments - This editable field displays any comments that were added in the New Project Wizard. Protection - Click the down-arrow to select one of three levels of password protection for this project file: none - this is the default setting (no password protection). read-only - the next time this panel file is opened, the Enter Access Password dialog appears, prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. To simply view the file (as read-only), click on the Read-Only command button (in the Enter Access Password dialog). If the file opened in read-only mode, the word "[Locked]" appears immediately to the right of the project name in the Workspace Navigator, and no edits are allowed. Also, files opened as read-only cannot be saved to another file name. locked - the next time the panel file is selected to open; the Enter Access Password dialog appears, prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. These protection options are not Windows file attributes, and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. Password - Use this text field to enter the password (1 - 259 characters) to use if the file is set as either read-only or locked. Once the password has been typed, it must be re-typed in the Confirm text field. Confirm - Use this text field to confirm the password by re-typing the password exactly as it was entered in the Password field. If the passwords don't match, a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. Use System Generated File Names for This Project - Click this option to apply system-generated filenames to this project. If the project was originally set up to use system-generated file names, then selecting this option will replace the original information with the updated information from this dialog. If system-generated file names were not used for the project, this information will be added on the next save.

36

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab

Use the options in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit setup information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. 27).

FIG. 27 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab

This dialog identifies the panel for which this project is designed, and indicates it's screen resolution. In the case of MIO R-4 remotes, the External Button Option selected is indicated as well. The options in this tab include: Refresh Frequency - Select the desired refresh frequency for the selected panel, from the dropdown list of supported refresh frequencies (based on the selected panel/resolution). Marquee Speed - Sets the speed of motion for Marquee text. Panel Strings - Use these three fields to specify text strings to appear on the panel, during these three conditions (Startup, Wakeup and Sleep). For example, if you entered "Hello!" for the Wakeup string, the panel will send this string to the NetLinx Master on wakeup. In order to receive strings from a device, the programmer typically creates a buffer or adds a DATA_EVENT/STRING: handler for the device. This will cause an RXON command to be sent to the device, then the master will pass the strings from the device. Power Up/Inactivity Settings Power up page - Click the down-arrow to view a drop-down list of all pages currently saved in this project. Click to select the initial startup page for the panel.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

37

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Power up popups - This field indicates the Power-Up popup pages that will appear over the Power up page. Inactivity page - Click the down arrow to select which page to flip to after the specified period of inactivity (set on the touch panel). Feedback blink rate (10th of second) - If you are using blinking button feedback in your project, use this field to specify the blink frequency, in 1/10th-second increments (default = 5). Device Port/Channel Allocation - The use of dynamic list tables with channel codes may require the designer to specify the ports and/or channels to be allocated on the panel, if the ports/channels utilized in the dynamic table(s) will exceed those declared in the project. These options include: Automatically calculate port allocation - select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum ports required (default setting). Specify port allocation - select to supply a specific port number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. When this option is selected, a text field is provided for you to manually enter the port number to be allocated. Automatically calculate channel allocation - select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum channels required (default setting). Specify channel allocation - select to supply a specific channel number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. When this option is selected, a text field is provided for you to manually enter the channel number.

Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab

Use the options in the Sensors tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors, Motion Sensors, Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors associated with the active panel file (FIG. 28):

FIG. 28 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab

38

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Light Sensor - Use these fields to specify the Level and Channel port/code assignments for the onboard light sensor. Motion Sensor - Use these fields to specify the Channel port/code assignments for the on-board motion sensor. Battery Levels - Use these fields to specify the Level port/code assignments for the on-board battery charger. Cradle Sensor (MVP panels only) - Use these fields to set the Channel port/code assignments for the Cradle Sensor on MVP panels. The channel will be turned on when the panel is docked (either in the tabletop docking station or in the wall cradle).

Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab

Use the options in the IR Emitters and Receivers tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit port information associated with the active panel file for AMX 38KHz IR emitting and receiving, AMX 455KHz IR emitting and receiving, and up to two user-defined ports for IR emitting using custom IR files (FIG. 29).

FIG. 29 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab

The NXD/T-CV7 have AMX IR receivers, and the MVP-7500/8400 and MVP-8400i have AMX and User-defined IR emitters as well as a cradle sensor (see below).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

39

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

The options in this tab include: AMX IR Emitters (MVPs only) - These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for standard AMX IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. User IR Emitters (MVPs only) - These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for user-defined IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. Additional User IR Emitters (MVP-5220 & MVP-5200i) - These options allow you to use up to 8 IR Emitters with the panel. The User IR Emitters table displays a grid of user IR ports and their respective values in two columns. The default value for each port is zero (not used). The value associated with each port can be modified in-place. The edit field will only accept integer values ranging from zero to 100 (consistent with other port values). Non-numeric values will be rejected and the value reset to zero. Values in the Port column cannot be edited. As with the original two user IR ports, all port values entered will be validated against other existing IR emitter or receiver port values to ensure that all non-zero IR port values are unique. Modifying values in the grid control will activate the Apply button as appropriate. Applying changes made to the grid control will set the project's "dirty" flag. AMX IR Receivers (CV7 and CV10s only) - These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for AMX IR receiving for NXD/T-CV7 and NXD/TCV10 panels.

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File

TPD4 supports two levels of password protection for Project (.TP4) files: Read-only - the next time this Project file is opened, the Enter Access Password dialog appears, prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. The password is not required to open and view the file. Note that if a read-only file is opened without using the password, it cannot be saved under a new file name. Locked - the next time the panel file is selected to open; the Enter Access Password dialog appears, prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. If the password is not entered correctly, the file will not be opened at all. These protection options are not Windows file attributes, and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. To apply password protection to the open Project file:

1. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab. 2. Click the down-arrow next to Protection to select a level of password protection from the drop-down list
(either read-only, locked or none - see FIG. 30).

FIG. 30 Project Properties dialog - Password settings (Project Information tab.)

3. Enter the password in the Password text field. Passwords can be from 1 to 259 characters in length. 4. Re-type the password in the Confirm field. If the passwords don't match, a "Passwords do not match"
message box is displayed, in which case you'll need to re-enter the password, or re-confirm the password, or both.

5. Click Apply to save the changes and apply the specified password to the Project file.

40

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Setting a Power Up Page

Use the Power-up page option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is turned on:

1. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. 2. In the Panel Setup Information tab, click the down arrow next to the Power up page field to display a list
of all of the pages in this project.

3. Select the page that you want to be used as the Power-up page from this list (FIG. 31).

FIG. 31 Project Properties dialog - Power-up page settings (IR Emitters and Receivers tab)

Setting Power Up Popup Pages

Use the Power-up popups option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify one or more popup pages in your project to be displayed over the Power up page when the panel is turned on:

1. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. 2. In the Panel Setup Information tab, click the green Plus sign icon below the Power up popups field to
invoke the Add Power Up Popup dialog, presenting a list of all popup pages in the active Project (FIG. 32).

FIG. 32 Project Properties dialog - Power-up popups settings (Panel Setup Information tab)

3. Select a popup page that you want to be displayed over the Power-up page from this list and click OK. 4. The selected popup page is indicated in the Power up popups field.
To display multiple popups over the Power up page, repeat steps 2 and 3 to select another popup. If you select more than one popup page, you can specify the display order via the up/down arrow buttons below the Power up popups field. The popup at the top of the list is the first to be displayed.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

41

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

To remove a popup from the Power up popups list, click the Remove Popup (X) button below the Power up popups field.

5. Click Apply to apply this change.

Setting an Inactive Page Flip

Use the Inactive Page Flip option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is inactive for a specified period of time:

1. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. 2. In the Panel Setup Information tab, click the down arrow next to the Inactivity Page field to display a list
of all of the pages in this project (FIG. 33).

FIG. 33 Project Properties dialog - Inactivity Page settings (Panel Setup Information tab)

3. Select the page that you want the panel to flip to when the panel is inactive for the amount of time
specified on the panel. You can use the Inactivity Page Flip option to create a "screen-saver" for the panel as part of your project.

42

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Using the Workspace Window

The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus), and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. 34):

FIG. 34 Workspace Navigator - all tabs

Workspace Window - Pages Tab

Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project, in the Workspace Navigator. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. Each open Project is represented by a folder, each one with a different colored panel icon: Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. Click the + symbol next to the folders, or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders, one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. These folders represent Popup Page Groups, and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time, and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. There are several actions that you can do simply by selecting an item in the tree and choosing the appropriate command or toolbar button: Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window Renaming Pages via the Workspace Window Drag and Drop Support

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

43

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab

Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes, Address codes, Level codes, String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file, displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window. This list is sorted by Port, and within Port by Code.

Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window

You can open a page or popup page in the active Project by double-clicking on the Page or Popup Page in the Workspace Window - Pages tab (FIG. 35).

FIG. 35 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window

44

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Using the Properties Window

The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page, popup page and button properties, and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General, Programming and States (FIG. 36).

FIG. 36 Properties Window

To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page, or the Page itself). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column, and drag it to another field. When you release the mouse button, the value is copied to the new location. With an item selected, the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value, and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field, TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog, and the original value is left unchanged.

Properties Window - General Tab

Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type - in this case, General buttons.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

45

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

Properties Control - Programming Tab

Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button. This information is displayed in a table format, similar to the General tab.

Properties Control - States Tab

Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button. This information is displayed in a table format, similar to the General tab. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels), meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0, 0.

Working With Multiple Projects

TPD4 supports working on multiple projects simultaneously, with a few limitations:

Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously

Each project page has its own tab along the bottom of the Design View window (known as MDI Page Tabs). TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. If you open more than 15 pages, only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. When this option is enabled, a tab is displayed for each open page. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area, but can be moved, toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). You can copy/paste pages, popup pages and buttons across projects to save time and effort.

Copying/Pasting Across Projects

TPD4 allows you to copy and paste pages, popup pages and buttons, including all of their various attributes across projects. This can obviously be a major time saver, and there are a few key points to keep in mind in doing so: Use the Paste Controls dialog to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address, Channel and Level codes), Page Flip Options, and Images/Slots/Sounds when the page, popup page or buttons are pasted into a separate project (FIG. 37). This a powerful tool. Give some thought to which elements of the page, popup page or button you want to retain in the target project.

FIG. 37 Paste Controls dialog

46

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

When you copy/paste across projects, if the selected pages, popup pages and/or buttons contain bitmaps, icons and/or sounds, those elements are copied into the target project along with the page, popup page or button (assuming that Retain image references, Retain slot references and Retain sound references are all selected in the Paste Controls dialog). Once the buttons are pasted into the target project, the bitmaps, icons and sounds that came over with the pasted buttons are available in the Resource Manager for the target project. If you copy/paste a page or popup page containing buttons, the buttons are copied along with the page. Copying/Pasting Pages, Popup Pages and Buttons Across Projects:

1. Open the Paste Control Options dialog (Button > Paste Controls) to specify wether to retain Function
Codes (Address, Channel and Level codes), Page Flip Options, and Images/Slots/Sounds when the copied buttons are pasted into a page in a separate project.

2. Click to select the source page or popup page (the one that you want to copy to another project), in the
Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). and Copy (use Ctrl+C, Edit > Copy, the Copy toolbar button (), or select Copy from the Workspace Navigator context window). You don't have to actually open a page to copy it: simply select the desired page with a single click in the Workspace Navigator window and copy the page.

3. In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab), click to select the target project (the one that you want to paste
the page or popup page into), and Paste (use Ctrl+V, Edit > Paste, the Paste toolbar button, or select Paste from the Workspace Navigator context window). Pages and Popup pages are automatically pasted into the correct folders.

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)

If a TP4 project file created with a previous version of TPD4 is opened (File > Open), the Project Migration dialog appears, prompting you to continue with the migration process. Click Yes to continue, then save the file. Click Cancel to abort the file open command. Once the migration process is complete and the project file has been saved, this process will not have to be performed again.

Converting TPD3 files to TPD4

TPDesign4 is backward-compatible with TPDesign3. However, project files that were created in TPDesign3 must be converted in order to be compatible with TPDesign4, for use with G4 panels. Using the TPD Conversion Wizard TPDesign4 includes a TPD Conversion Wizard tool that makes it easy to convert your existing TPDesign3 files for use with TPDesign4. Select File > Save As Different Panel Type to launch the TPD Conversion Wizard. The TPD Conversion Wizard steps you through the conversion process in three dialogs:

1. Step 1 of 3 (Select Source and Destination): In the TPD Conversion Wizard - Select a Source &
Destination (Step 1 of 3) dialog, select the TPD project file that you want to convert (use the browse button to navigate to the desired file, via the Open dialog).

a. Click the down arrows next to Panel Type and Resolution to specify the target G4 panel for the project
file.

b. If you selected a panel that supports multiple resolutions (i.e. NXP-TPI4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI),
you can specify the target resolution for the project. A description and image of the selected panel is displayed. c. Click Next to proceed.

2. Step 2 of 3 (View Warnings and Substitute Fonts): The TPD Conversion Wizard - Warnings & Font
Substitution (Step 2 of 3) dialog in the wizard contains two read-only text fields: The Pre-Conversion Warnings list box alerts you to any possible conflicts that will exist in the selected file, once the conversion process is applied. For example, if the target panel/resolution differs from the original target of the TPDesign3 file, you will see a Pre-Conversion warning

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

47

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

message indicating that scaling will occur. The conversion wizard handles most of these issues for you automatically. The lower list box indicates any fonts that were specified in the original TPDesign3 file, but that are not available to TPDesign4 (i.e. are not currently installed on your PC). For each unmatched font listed, you can select a substitute font to use instead. If all fonts used in the original file are still available, the message "No unmatched fonts" is displayed.

3. Step 3 of 3 (Finish): The TPD Conversion Wizard - Finish (Step 3 of 3) dialog lists the selected file, the
original panel/resolution association, and the target panel/resolution. When you convert a TPDesign3 project to a TPDesign4 project via the TPD Conversion Wizard, TPDesign4 generates a report that lists errors and warnings relating to the conversion process. The Errors and Warnings reports are displayed in the Errors and Warnings Report dialog. Neither errors nor warnings will prevent the file from being compiled, but will probably require that the issues be resolved in order to have buttons and pages that look and function as expected. Errors are issues that result in unexpected button borders, usually because there are button or buttons in the project that are smaller than the minimum size of the selected border. Warnings are issues that represent potential visual/formatting problems, like minor shifts in shape and size on some buttons. The bottom text box lists all Warnings encountered during the conversion process. Click Filter Warnings to select which warning messages to display or suppress via the Filter Conversion Warnings dialog.

4. Click Finish to launch the conversion process and open the Errors and Warnings Report dialog where you
can view/fix the resulting warnings. When the TPD file is converted and opened in TPD4, the pages and popup pages may appear in a different order than they occurred in TPDesign3, since TPD4 sorts the page and popup pages alphabetically.

R-4 Remote Controller Projects

AMX R-4 Remote Controllers feature a color LCD touch screen that can be programmed and customized like any other touch panel type. The pushbuttons on R-4 remotes are treated in TPD4 the same as external pushbuttons on any other panel type, and can be customized as External Controls.

The display area on R-4 remotes is 240 X 320 (pixels).

Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers

The process of creating a TPD4 project for R-4 remote controllers is essentially the same as for any other panel type, with a few caveats:

1. Select File > New to launch the New Project Wizard (New Project Wizard - Step 1) dialog. 2. Select R-4 as the Panel Type. 3. Select an External Button Option from the drop-down list.
As with the panel resolution, this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.

4. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog. Fill in the fields in this dialog as
desired.

5. Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog. Fill in the fields in this dialog as
desired.

48

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

6. Select Finish to close the New Project Wizard.

At this point, the initial page is opened in the Design View, ready for you to: Set Page Properties and add Pages (note that the display area on R-4 remotes is 240x320 pixels). Add Buttons and Popup Pages Set General, Programming and States properties for Buttons Pages Popup Pages (keep in mind that R-4 projects work just like any other panel type) Configure the external pushbuttons.

R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types

Computer Control, TakeNote, and Text Input buttons are not supported by R-4 remote controllers, and are not displayed in the Properties Window (when an R-4 project is active). All button types continue to be available in the Drawing Toolbar. However, TPD4 will display an error message if you attempt to add an unsupported button type in an R-4 project.

R-4 Setup Codes

Levels:
R-4 Setup Codes - Levels
Mesh: Mesh: Mesh Neighbor: Mesh Neighbor: Mesh Neighbor: Mesh Neighbor: Mesh Neighbor: Mesh Neighbor: Current TX Link Quality Current RX Link Quality Signal Strength Row 1 Signal Strength Row 2 Signal Strength Row 3 Signal Strength Row 4 Signal Strength Row 5 Signal Strength Row 6

Addresses
R-4 Setup Codes - Addresses
Time Display: Date Display: Selected Format Selected Format

These setup codes apply to R-4 firmware versions beginning with version 2.61.10.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

49

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4)

External Button Options

The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons, the External Button Options list is empty, i.e. "<none>". If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons, the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote, the options include: Default Configuration - for use with a standard MIO R-4. Keypad with Transport Functions - for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. Teletext keypad - for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions - for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. As with the panel resolution, this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.

R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes

The default channel codes for R-4 external buttons match the corresponding G4 API values (defined in G4API.axi): R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes
Button MENU Up Down Left Right Select EXIT INFO GUIDE LAST G4 API CONSTANT BTN_MENU_FUNC BTN_MENU_UP BTN_MENU_DN BTN_MENU_LT BTN_MENU_RT BTN_MENU_SELECT BTN_MENU_EXIT BTN_MENU_INFO BTN_MENU_GUIDE BTN_TUNER_PREV Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 105 235

The default values are read in when a new project is created. These defaults will not affect any existing R-4 projects.

50

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Working With The Resource Manager

Overview
Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. 38).

FIG. 38 Resource Manager dialog

This dialog contains features and options that allow you to easily organize and manage Images, Slots and Sounds for your project, organized into four tabs: Images: The Images tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. Dynamic Images: The Dynamic Images tab allows you to manage images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server, external to the panel. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Slots: The Slots tab allows you to manage slot assignments for images and icons. Sounds: The Sounds tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files (.WAV or .MP3) to be used in your project. The Resource Manager contains its own toolbar, above the tabs (FIG. 39).

FIG. 39 Resource Manager dialog - Toolbar

Depending on what you are doing with the listed Image, Dynamic Image or Sound files, one or more of the following options will be available:

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

51

Working With The Resource Manager

Cut/Copy/Paste: Use these controls primarily to move images files to and from the Slots tab. They work in the typical way, and support selected multiple files. Note that if you copy or cut multiple files to clipboard memory, you must select at least the same number of slots (in the Slots tab) in order to paste all of the files. If you only select one slot, when you paste the multiple images, you'll only see the first one that you selected.

You can also cut/copy/paste within any of the tabs.

Delete: Select one or more files and click Delete to delete them from the collection. The files are not deleted from the hard drive, just from this project. If any of the files selected for deletion are used by the active project, the Resource(s) In Use dialog is displayed, with a listing of all files targeted for deletion, as well as the Page(s) on which each file is used. By default, the Resource(s) In Use dialog is set to display any time a used resource is deleted. However, you can toggle the display of this dialog either by selecting the "Don't show me again" checkbox in the dialog, or by selecting "When deleting resources in use" in the Application tab of the Preference dialog. Rename: Select an image file and click Rename to open the Rename dialog, containing two fields: Old Name (read-only, displays the current file name), and New Name (enter the new file name in this field). Click OK to rename the file. Undo/Redo: All actions in the Resource Manager can be undone and/or redone. Import: Click to invoke the Open dialog. Use this dialog to locate and select image and sound files to import into this tab. When images of any (supported) file type except PNG are imported into a project, the files are automatically converted to JPGs. For this reason, if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension), TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. New: This option is available only on the Dynamic Images tab (and replaces the Import button that is on the other tabs). Click to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog, which allows you to add dynamic images to your project. Export: Use this option to export one or more files to a specified directory. Use the Choose Directory dialog to pick the target directory. List Style: Click the down-arrow to open a drop-down list of the available display options for this tab: Small Icons - lists the files in columns, with small file icons. List - lists the files in a single column, with small file icons. Details - lists the files with file size and image dimension descriptions. Thumbnails - displays a thumbnail image of each file.

52

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Working With Images

Resource Manager dialog - Images tab
The Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project (FIG. 40).

FIG. 40 Resource Manager dialog - Images tab

Use this tab as a "library" of every image file that will be used in your project (for pages, popup pages, buttons and icons). It is important to import all of your images to this tab first, before they are applied in the project, so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project, regardless of their context (i.e. button state, page background, etc). The Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all image files. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected image file(s) to slot(s).

Static Image Files

Before you can apply images to buttons and pages in your Project, the image and sound files must first be imported into the Project via the Resource Manager dialog. Once the image has been imported, it is available for selection to be applied to Pages, Popup pages or Buttons (at the state level).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

53

Working With The Resource Manager

Consider assigning Slot positions to those image files that you expect to use multiple times in the Project.

Supported Image File Types

TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4, only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4, the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Unless you are actually using transparency, JPGs are recommended over PNGs, since they are usually slightly smaller in size. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details.

Importing Image Files Into Your Project

To import image files into your Project

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Open the Images tab. Click the Import button to invoke the Open dialog. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing images that have the same file name as the image selected for import. If this option is selected, anytime an image with a duplicate file name is imported, it will replace the original image on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project.

This functionality works in an identical manner for sound files.

5. Locate and select the file(s) to import. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. 6. Click Open to import the files to the Images tab.
Notes on importing image files: When images of any supported file type (except PNG) are imported into a project, the files are automatically converted to JPGs. For this reason, if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension), TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed.

54

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

The largest image size supported on the panels is 1280x1024. Any image files that are imported to the project that are larger than 1280x1024 are automatically scaled down to fit this maximum resolution. Any scaling that occurs is proportional, so that the image will not be stretched. If you import an image file that has already been imported to the Images tab, the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of...". This is true even if the second version of the image file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

55

Working With The Resource Manager

Working With Dynamic Images

Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab
The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project (FIG. 41):

FIG. 41 Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab

Use this tab as a "library" of every dynamic image file that will be used in your project (for pages, popup pages, buttons and icons). It is important to import all of your dynamic images to this tab first, before they are applied in the project, so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project, regardless of their context (i.e. button state, page background, etc). Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. The Dynamic Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all images. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected Image file(s) to slot(s). Get Live File: Click to retrieve a thumbnail of the live feed, to replace the generic icon in this tab.

56

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Dynamic Images
Dynamic Images are images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server, external to the panel. To use dynamic images in your project you'll specify a URL, rather than a directory path to an image file. Dynamic images can be applied to all button types except Computer Control and Text Area buttons. The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Use the Scale Bitmap To Fit state property (Properties Control window - States tab) to automatically scale (down only) the dynamic image to fit the button that it is being displayed on.

Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project

To add dynamic image files to the Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog:

1. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. 2. Open the Dynamic Images tab (FIG. 41 on page 56). 3. Click the New button to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. 42).

FIG. 42 Create Dynamic Image dialog

4. Fill in the fields provided:

Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. This can be any name you choose, try to give the file a descriptive name so that it can be identified easily later. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default), or FTP. Host: Enter the Host Name (URL) or IP Address of the image source. Path: Enter the Path for the image source. File: Enter the File name for the image source. User: Enter User name if desired (optional). Password: Enter Password if desired (optional). Refresh Rate: Leave the Refresh Rate set to zero (default). Refresh only at panel startup: Click to refresh this image only when the panel is powered up. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for Dynamo Resource images only). This option is only displayed if the current panel type supports Dynamo Resource images (see the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6).

5. Click OK to add the file to the Dynamic Images tab.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

57

Working With The Resource Manager

Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image

The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image to the Resource Manager:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example, we'll use "Photo 1". To provide the other information required in this dialog, refer to the source image properties:

a. In a web browser, go to the image that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. b. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. 43).

FIG. 43 Example Element Properties dialog

As indicated in the drop-down example above, the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information, but also protocol and path information as well. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this photo: http://c1.ac-images.myspacecdn.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004.jpg The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: c. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog, and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog, it is not required as part of the Host. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol, and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. At this point, the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: c1.ac-images.myspacecdn.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004.jpg d. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. e. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. 44): Name = Photo 1 Protocol = HTTP Host = c1.ac-images.myspacecdn.com Path = images02/64 File = l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank, since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case.

58

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

FIG. 44 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog

The Refresh Rate should be left to zero (default setting), to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero, the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. This option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted.

f. Click OK to add this image as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager (FIG. 45).

FIG. 45 Example Dynamic Image

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

59

Working With The Resource Manager

When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager, they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image such as is shown in the example above Double-click on any Dynamic image icon, or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image.

DynaMo Dynamic Images

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher), and a select number of AMX Touch Panels support "enhanced" or "accelerated" Dynamo images. In TPDesign4, these are referred to as Dynamo Resource images, as opposed to Dynamic (static) or Dynamo (non-accelerated) images. See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. Dynamo Resource images are essentially the same as standard Dynamo images with one key difference: the playback of Dynamo Resource images is accelerated to up to 30 frames-per-second. The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image, with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be accelerated, simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. 46).

FIG. 46 Create Dynamic Image dialog - Dynamo Resource option

Creating a DynaMo Image 1. Select Panel > Resource Manager to open the Resource Manager dialog. 2. In the Dynamic Images tab, click on New to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. 3. Fill in the fields provided:
Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default), or FTP. Host: Enter the IP Address of the camera/video server. Path: Enter the Path for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation (see the Network Path Information section on page 63). File: Enter the File name for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation. User: Enter User name if required (this field is optional). Password: Enter Password if required (this field is also optional).

60

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Refresh Rate: Refreshing resources will cause the button displaying that resource to refresh as well. The default value is 0, which means that the resource is only downloaded once. Refresh only at panel startup: This option is only available if the Refresh Rate is set to zero, and causes the dynamic image to refresh only upon restart of the panel, as opposed to upon each visit to the page (as is the default). Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for accelerated DynaMo Dynamic images only - FIG. 47).

FIG. 47 Create Dynamic Image dialog - Dynamo Resource option

The User (name) and Password fields are typically used with FTP servers. To allow other users to access the files via FTP without password protection, leave the User and Password fields blank. The user must type either "Anonymous" or "Guest" to access the specified FTP site.

4. Create a General button on which the DynaMo Dynamic Image will be displayed, that matches the output
resolution of the camera/video server providing the dynamic image. Some cameras/servers support more than one output resolution. Select one that fits your application requirements and interface design.

5. Select the DynaMo Dynamic Image that you want to apply to this button, via the button's Bitmap
properties:

a. In the States tab of the Properties window, select Bitmap to enable the Browse (...) button b. Click Browse to access the Select Resource dialog. c. In the Dynamic Images tab, select the dynamic image that you want to display on this button. Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager
The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image, with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be treated as an (accelerated) Dynamo Resource image, simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog. The Dynamo Resource option is only displayed if the currently selected panel-type supports Accelerated Dynamo images (see AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images). When working with Dynamo Resource images, it is important to note the following: If there are multiple Dynamic images displayed on a single page, only one of them should be set as a Dynamo Resource image. While TPDesign4 will allow you to place more than one Dynamo Resource image on a page, the frame-rate on all Dynamo Resource images may be reduced as a result. Dynamic images that have the Dynamo Resource property set are displayed with a modified icon, which resembles the standard Dynamic Image icon but features a lightning bolt (FIG. 48).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

61

Working With The Resource Manager

FIG. 48 Dynamic Resource Image & Dynamic Image icons (Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog)

Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images

Dynamo Resource Images have specific scaling/cropping options available via the Scale Bitmap to Fit (State) property for any state that has a Dynamo Resource image assigned to the "Bitmap" property. The Scale Bitmap To Fit options presented here depend on the panel type selected: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - The Dynamo Resource image is doubled in size. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). Click here for a listing of all AMX touch panels that support Dynamo Resource Images. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Resource image to fit the container button, popup or page. The Scale to Fit option for Dynamo Resource images differs from panels that do not support Dynamo Resource images in that the aspect ratio of the image is maintained.

Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images

Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from a panel-type that supports Dynamo Resource images, with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of 2x, into a panel-type that doesn't support Dynamo Resource images results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from an OMAP panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of Scale to Fit, into an FPGA panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. Any paste operation that causes a Dynamo Resource image to be imported into a target panel project that does not support Dynamo Resource images will cause the Scale Bitmap to Fit setting to be reset on the imported resource.

62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output

A number of leading manufacturers are offering a variety of equipment that provides Motion JPEG streaming output. Below is a sample list of popular manufacturers and models: Motion JPEG Cameras and Servers
Manufacturer Axis Network camera 205 Network Camera 2100 Network Camera 2120 Network Camera 2420 Network Camera Panasonic KX-HCM280 Color Pan Tilt Zoom KX-HCM10 Indoor Pan Tilt KX-HCM250 Wireless Pan Tilt KX-HCM230 Outdoor Pan Tilt Sony Trendnet Vivotek SCN-RZ30N Pan/Tilt/25x Zoom TV-IP301 IP2111 Network Camera IP2112 Network Camera VS2402 Video Server Network video server 241Q Video Server 4 Inputs 241S Video Server 1 Input

Network Path Information

While AMX strives to bring to the market innovative features such as support for Motion JPEG, at points we have to work through the different ways manufacturers implement standards. In the case of streaming network cameras/servers, manufacturers are using somewhat different syntax for requesting Motion JPEG streams from their networked cameras and servers. For example, many networked cameras/servers are accessed using a regular HTML browser, and the camera/ server is serving up an HTML page with a video window being a part of the page. For Dynamo, however, the panel needs to access only the M-JPEG stream, not the entire HTML page served by the camera/server by default. Depending on the camera/network video server type you are using, you may need to consult product documentation, or if necessary, contact manufacturer's technical support. In general, however, what is being sent to the camera/server in the path is a CGI call that may have additional parameters based on the feature set of the camera/server and the syntax the manufacturer requires. What follows are examples for some of most popular manufacturers. Like with any other type of equipment AMX controls, manufacturer's documentation and customer support are the most reliable ways of obtaining information on the device's communication protocol/syntax. This can also help you fully utilize optional features available on that specific device. However, at times it can be difficult to get the needed information with respect to the protocol/syntax of a particular camera/server. One way to work around this is connecting to your networked camera or video server using an Internet browser that captures the location or path to the stream. An example of such browser is Mozilla FireFox. Using the browser you can go to your network device's IP address, left click on the streaming image and select Copy Image Location. You can download a free version of FireFox at www.mozilla.org.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

63

Working With The Resource Manager

Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis

Axis equipment supports a number of resolutions, and therefore requires that the target resolution be indicated. Each camera can also have a camera ID number but that is optional, just as a number of other features that can be indicated in the path (FIG. 49).

FIG. 49 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis

Manufacturer: Axis Model: 2100 (camera) Path: axis-cgi/mjpg/video.cgi?camera=&resolution=320x240

Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic

FIG. 50 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic

Manufacturer: Panasonic Model: BL-C10A (camera) Path: nphMotionJpeg?resolution=320x240&Quality=Standard

64

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek

FIG. 51 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek

Manufacturer: Vivotek Model: 2111 (camera) Path: cgi-bin/video.jpg?cam=1&quality=3&size=2

Working With Trendnet IP Cameras

To get a streaming image from the TV-IP301 Trendnet IP camera on to a dynamic image window of a touch panel:

1. Configure the camera for JPEG and 15fps.

The default settings of "640x480" and "Highest Quality" should be OK.

2. In TPD4, set the dynamic image properties to:

Protocol: HTTP (default) Host: (the default IP of this camera is 192.168.1.30) Path: goform File: video2 user & password are blank Refresh Rate: 1 (or more)

DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image

The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image in the form of an online streaming webcam to the Resource Manager:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example, we'll use "Beach 1"). To provide the other information required in this dialog, refer to the source image properties:

a. In a web browser, go to the web cam that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource
Manager.

b. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. 52):

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

65

Working With The Resource Manager

FIG. 52 Online webcam - element properties

As indicated above, the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information, but also protocol and path information as well. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this webcam: http://coralsandsinn.axiscam.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image.jpg

5. The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties
dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work:

a. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog, and paste it into the Host field in the
Create Dynamic Image dialog.

b. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog, it is
not required as part of the Host. c. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol, and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. At this point, the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: coralsandsinn.axiscam.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image.jpg d. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. e. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog: Host = coralsandsinn.axiscam.net Path = axis-cgi/jpg/image.cgi? File = camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank, since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case.

66

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

The Refresh Rate should be left to zero, to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero, the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. The Refresh Only at Panel Startup option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. Click Dynamo Resource to use this Dynamic Image as an (accelerated) DynaMo Dynamic Image.

FIG. 53 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog

f. Click OK to add this webcam as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager.

When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager, they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image. Double-click on any Dynamic image icon, or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

67

Working With The Resource Manager

Working With Slots

TPD4 utilizes the concept of Slots for adding Icons to Pages, Popup Pages or Buttons in the Project. Once an image file is imported into the Project (via the Resource Manager), it can be assigned to a Slot position. Once the image file is assigned to a Slot, it can be used as an Icon in your Project.

TPD4 supports up to 500 icon slot assignments.

The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog lists all Icon Slot assignments currently defined in the Project.

Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab

The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to preview and manage all image and sound files that are being used in your project (FIG. 54).

FIG. 54 Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab

Where the Images and Sounds tabs contain "libraries" of all Image and Sound files (even if they have not been assigned to a slot), the Slot tab lists only those image and sound files that are currently assigned to a slot. Once a Image or Sound has been assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager, it is considered to be an Icon. All image and sound files must be assigned to a slot before they can applied to pages, popup pages and/or buttons as Icons. Once an image or sound file has been assigned a slot, it is available for selection as an icon through the Properties Control Window (States tab). Each project has 2000 slots available.

68

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

If you don't intend to use a image or sound file as an Icon, there is no need to assign it to a slot (see Bitmaps vs. Icons). The toolbar button in this tab contains several command options: Select All: Click to select all slots (1-2000). By default, the program limits you to 2000 slots per panel. However, you can use up to 9900 slots per panel if necessary by changing the maximum number of slots per panel. Move: Use this option to move a slot assignment. First select a file / slot assignment, then click on the target slot for the selected file and click Move. The selected file is moved to the selected slot. Note that the Overwrite and Insert options affect how the Move option works. Duplicate: Use this option to duplicate a selected file to another slot. First select the file that you want to duplicate, then select the slot that you want to target for the duplicated file, and click Duplicate. The selected file is duplicated in the targeted slot. Swap: Use this option to swap two file / slot assignments. Ctrl + click to select two files, and click Swap. The two file / slot assignments are swapped. Assign: This command assigns the selected Image or Sound file(s) to slot(s). Cancel: If have selected one or more images, and clicked Assign to Slot (in the Images tab), you can click Cancel to cancel the process before you set the slot assignment.

Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions

To assign image files, dynamic images or sound files to slot positions for use in the Project:

1. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. 2. Open the Images, Dynamic Images or Sounds tab, depending on the type of file you are adding. 3. Select one or more files (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually, or Shift + click to select a range
of files).

4. Click Assign To Slot. This open the Slots tab (FIG. 54 on page 68).
If there are no images or sounds already assigned to slots (the Slots tab is empty), click Assign (in the Slots tab) to assign the file to slot 1. If you selected multiple files, they will be assigned in the order in which they were selected. If there are already some slot assignments present (in the Slots tab), you'll have to more careful about how you choose to assign the files. Use the Overwrite and Insert radio buttons to select a preference for assigning files to slot(s) with previous file assignments. Select Overwrite to automatically overwrite any pre-existing file assignments in the affected slots. Select Insert to insert the files without overwriting anything. In this case, the other slot assignments are shifted to accommodate the new assignments. If you are assigning a single file to a slot with a pre-existing file assignment, click to select the slot to which you want to apply the image file and click Assign (in the Slots tab). If you are assigning multiple files to multiple slots, click the slot where you want to begin pasting the set of images. The files will be pasted consecutively, in the order in which they were selected. When pasting multiple image files to the Slots tab, you must select the same number of slots as the number of images copied. For example, if you selected ten files to assign to slots, select ten slots before assigning the files. If you select just one slot, only the first file selected will be assigned. If you select five slots, only the first five files will be assigned.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

69

Working With The Resource Manager

Working With Icons

Icons are bitmap images that have imported into the project, and assigned slot numbers (via the Resource Manager dialog). Use icons as button graphics that can be placed "on top" of a color fill, bitmap or video fill background. Any supported image file can be made to be an icon, simply by assigning it to a slot position. In TPD4, icons exist before bitmaps in the Z-Order, so they are always drawn on top of a bitmap image. Think of bitmaps as the background button graphic, and icons as the foreground graphic image. Text is always drawn last, on top of the icon. Icons allow for complex graphics and animations. For example, you could place a static icon over an animated bitmap or color transition effect. Icons can also be put into motion via the Slot Position tweener (accessible via the Tweeners sub-menu).

Bitmaps vs. Icons

TPD4 uses two concepts of image files: Bitmaps and Icons. There are important differences in the way each type is treated: Bitmaps: The term Bitmap is a generic term that describes any pixel-based image file. In TPD4, a Bitmap can be any supported image type (not limited to .BMP files). For example, JPGs, PNGs, PSDs and BMPs (among others) are supported Bitmap file types. The important thing to understand about Bitmaps in the context of TPD4 buttons is that they are drawn first, and they are always placed in a layer beneath any Icons. For example, you could create a button with a Bitmap image, and place an Icon on top of the Bitmap. You can think of Bitmaps as the background image used on Pages, Popup Pages and Buttons, which may also use Icons (as well as text) in addition to the background image (see Z-Order for details). Bitmaps that have been imported into the Project are listed in the Images tab of the Resource Manager. Icons: The term Icon refers to any image file that has been imported into the Project and assigned to a Slot position in the Resource Manager. Icons are different than Bitmaps in several ways: All imported images are considered to be Bitmaps, but an image cannot also be referenced as an Icon until it is assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. Having an image assigned to a slot allows you to reference the same image as either a Bitmap or an Icon. When an image's slot position assignment is deleted from the Project, the image is still available as a Bitmap (and remains in any other slot it is assigned to), however, when a Bitmap (in the Images tab of the Resource Manager) is deleted, that image is removed from the entire project, including all slots to which it was assigned. Icons occupy slots in the Resource Manager; Bitmaps cannot. Icons are drawn after Bitmaps, and are always appear on top of the Bitmap layer. See Z-Order for details. Icon Slot Assignments that have been specified in the Project are listed in the Slots tab of the Resource Manager.

70

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Working With Sounds

Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab
The Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files to be used in your project (FIG. 55):

FIG. 55 Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab

TPD4 supports .WAV and .MP3 files.

Use this tab as a "library" of every sound file that will be used in your project (for pages, popup pages, buttons and icons). It is important to import all of your sound files to this tab first, before they are applied in the project, so that you can maintain an organized profile of all sound files in the project, regardless of their context (i.e. button state, page flip, etc). The Slots tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all sound files. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the sound files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected sound file(s) to slot(s).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

71

Working With The Resource Manager

Supported Sound File Types

TPD4 supports WAV and MP3 sound formats. The primary difference between the two is that MP3 represents a compressed version of a WAV file. If MP3 files are encoded correctly, you should experience very little (if any) difference in sound quality. There are many freeware programs available to encode WAV files into MP3's.

Importing Sound Files To Your Project

To import sound files to the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. 55 on page 71):

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Open the Sounds tab. Click the Import button. This invokes the Open dialog. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing sound files that have the same file name as the file selected for import. If this option is selected, anytime a sound file with a duplicate file name is imported, it will replace the original file on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project.

5. Locate and select the file(s) to import. 6. Click Open to import the files to the Sounds tab.
If you import an sound file that has already been imported to the Sounds tab, the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of...". This is true even if the second version of the sound file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension.

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory
To export image (including dynamic images) and sound files from Resource Manager dialog to a specified directory:

1. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. 2. Open the appropriate tab for the type of file you want to export (Images, Dynamic Images, Slots or
Sounds).

3. Select one or more files to export (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually, or Shift + click to
select a range of files).

4. Click the Export button. This opens the Choose Directory dialog (FIG. 56).

FIG. 56 Choose Directory dialog

5. Use the Browse button to locate a target directory for the files. 6. Click OK. The program prompts you when the export is finished.

72

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With The Resource Manager

Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs

TPD4 supports the use of external programs for editing image and/or sound files used in your project. You must first associate one or more external editing programs with Image files, and another for Sound files. Once you have indicated a program to be used as the default editor, you can access it via the Edit button in the Images and Sounds tabs of the Resource Manager dialog. Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to add external image and sound editing programs, and specify the default editors. See the Program Preferences section on page 265 for details.

Editing Image Files 1. Open the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog. 2. Select the image file that you want to edit. 3. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for image files. Editing Sound Files 1. Open the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog. 2. Select the sound file that you want to edit. 3. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for sound files.
When the edit session begins, the image or sound file is opened in the default editing program, and control is returned to TPD4. Any saved changes to the resource made in the external editor will be immediately reflected in TPD4. Any action taken in TPD4 that would change the state of the image or sound file being edited (e.g., delete, rename, undo/redo, etc.) will cause the link between TPD4 and the external application to be broken. Any subsequent changes made in the external editor will not be reflected nor applied. See the Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files section on page 272, the Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files section on page 272 and the Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program section on page 273 for more information.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

73

Working With The Resource Manager

74

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Pages

Working With Pages

Overview
Pages are not only containers for buttons, but can also have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. Pages cannot have borders and possess only one state. You may place text directly on a page outside the context of a button. You can select the name for the page, the page background color, the text color for text applied directly to the page, and a font for any text specified (including the font size and settings). If you change any of these properties (except the name) your changes will be saved and future page creations will carry those selections forward. Each page must be uniquely named within its respective panel file in order to be accepted by the program; all name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. The maximum number of pages in a panel file = 500. The active project/page is indicated in the Workspace Window by a green wedge to the left of the panel and page icons. Double-click on any page contained in any open project to set it as the active project. In FIG. 57, "TPI-PRO-DVI test" is the active project, and "Page 1" is the active page in the project:

FIG. 57 Workspace Window (indicating the active Project & Page)

Page Flips (which provide the ability to "flip" from one page to another via a button press) are a button-oriented function - see the Creating a Page Flip section on page 108.

Creating a New Page

1. Select Panel > Add Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Page dialog (FIG. 58).

FIG. 58 Add Page dialog

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

75

Working With Pages

2. Enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name
characters).

3. Set the Page Background color: a. Click the browse button (...) next to Page Background to open the Colors dialog. b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Note the current and new color selections are shown
together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.

4. Set the Page Text color (for text applied directly to the page): a. Click the browse button (...) next to Text to open the Colors dialog. b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Note the current and new color selections are shown
together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.

5. Set the Font Name and Size. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the window
beneath these fields.

6. Click OK to add the new page to the active project. The new page will be appear in the Workspace
Navigator in the Pages folder, under the project to which the page was added (as the active page). Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index, you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. In most cases, any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle, since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly.

Setting Page Properties

Panel Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Window. To set Page-level properties, click on the Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). With the Page selected, the Properties Window displays the properties available for the Page, separated into three tabs (General, Programming and States).

Setting General Properties: Pages

Use the General tab of the Properties Window to set/edit page properties. The General tab contains a table that lists the page properties for the active page. To edit any of the listed properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following general properties are supported at the page level: Name Description

Setting Programming Properties: Pages

Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page programming properties. The Programming tab contains a table that lists the programming properties for the active page. To edit any of the listed properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following programming properties are supported at the page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code

Setting States Properties: Pages

Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page state properties. The State tab contains a table that lists the page state properties for the active page. To edit any of the listed properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both.

76

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Pages

The following state properties are supported at the page level: Draw Order Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Video Fill Video Touch Pass-Thru Bitmap Bitmap Justification Icon Slot Icon Justification Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

Renaming a Page
To rename any Page in the active project, simply click on a Page entry in the Workspace Window and type directly into the text field (FIG. 59).

FIG. 59 Renaming a Page (via the Workspace Window)

Adding a Fill Color to a Page

1. Select the page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Window, click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 60).

FIG. 60 States tab of the Properties Control window - Fill Color field

3. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog, and select the color that you want to apply to the page. 4. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

77

Working With Pages

Adding a Bitmap to a Page

You can apply a bitmap directly to a Page in your project, to serve as the background image.

1. Select the page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Window, click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 61).

FIG. 61 States tab of the Properties Control window - Bitmap field

3. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select the desired bitmap.
Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project.

4. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the
justification of the image on the page (FIG. 62).

FIG. 62 States tab of the Properties Control window - Bitmap Justification field

Select Absolute to manually position the image.

5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Page. To scale an image to fit a target Page, open the image in any graphics editor program, and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page. To check the size of the Pages in your project, check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.

78

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Pages

Adding an Icon to a Page

You can apply an image Icon directly to a Page in your project, to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)).

1. Select the page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (...)
button (FIG. 63).

FIG. 63 States tab of the Properties Control window - Icon Slot field

3. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select the desired icon. If you
don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog, you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position.

4. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification
of the image icon on the page (FIG. 64).

FIG. 64 States tab of the Properties Control window - Icon Justification field

Select Absolute to manually position the image.

5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

Adding Text to a Page

Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text.

Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state), you can display text directly on a Page in your project. If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Page, the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap, unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206).

1. Select the page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Text field to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 65).

FIG. 65 States tab of the Properties Control window - Text field

Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog, and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). Alternatively, you can type directly into the Text field. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

79

Working With Pages

Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text, if any exists.

3. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 66).

FIG. 66 States tab of the Properties Control window - Text Color field

Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Page text.

4. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 67).

FIG. 67 States tab of the Properties Control window - Font field

Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).

5. Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the
text on the page (FIG. 68).

FIG. 68 States tab of the Properties Control window - Text Justification field

Select Absolute to manually position the text.

6. Click Word Wrap, and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Page
(Yes or No - FIG. 69).

FIG. 69 States tab of the Properties Control window - Word Wrap field

If you select No, any text that won't fit on the selected Page may not be visible, depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Page.

80

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Pages

Displaying a Video Source on a Page

TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page, Popup Page or Button. To apply a video fill to a Page:

1. Select (or a create) a Page in your project. 2. In the Properties Control window - States Tab, click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available
video sources. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. 70):

FIG. 70 States tab of the Properties Control window - Video Fill field

3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.

Copying/Pasting Pages
Copying Pages
In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab), at the top most level are Panel Names. Immediately below the panel names is a Pages folder (containing Pages), and a Popup Pages folder (containing Popup pages). You can copy a page either by selecting a Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window, or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar).

Pasting Pages
You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied page onto: (1) an active Design View window (2) the panel name in the Workspace Navigator (3) the folder named Pages Pasting a page onto the Popup Pages folder (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Deleting Pages From a Project

To delete a page from the active project, select the page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab), and select Edit > Delete. The program will prompt you to verify the page deletion first. All panels must include at least one page, therefore, deleting the last remaining page is not allowed.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

81

Working With Pages

Exporting Pages as Image Files

Use the options in the Export Page Images dialog to export one or Pages in the current Project as image files:

1. Select Panel > Export Page Images to open the Export Page Images dialog (FIG. 71).

FIG. 71 Export Page Images dialog

2. Use the checkboxes in the Pages and Popups lists to select which Pages and Popup Pages to export. 3. Specify a target directory for the exported image files in the Export Directory field. Use the browse button
(...) to navigate to a target directory via the Browse For Folder dialog.

4. Specify a template for the resulting filenames in the Filename Template field. By default, the template is
set to include the Panel file name and the Page name into the generated image's file name. As described on the dialog, use $P to insert the Panel name and $p to insert the Page name into the exported file's name. The file extension is automatically, based on the File Format selection.

5. Use the Scale% up and down arrows indicate a percentage to down-scale the exported images. The
default setting is 100% (no scaling).

6. Select a image file type (JPG, PNG or BMP) for the resulting image files from the File Format dropdown. If JPG is selected, you can select the desired level of image compression

7. Select Export current display state for buttons to capture the Pages as they are currently displayed in the
Design View, with the button's current display state. If this option is not selected, it will export the buttons in the (default) Off state. By default, this option is enabled.

8. Select Export popup pages shown on pages to include any Popup Pages that are being displayed on the
Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. If this option is not selected, only the Page underneath any currently viewed Popup Pages will be exported. By default, this option is enabled.

9. Select Export information overlay to include any function code information this is currently being
displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. If this option is not selected, only the Page underneath any currently displayed function codes will be exported. By default, this option is disabled.

82

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Pages

Printing Pages
Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project, as they will appear when printed, in the Print Preview window (FIG. 72).

FIG. 72 Print Preview window

Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print: Prints the current page view Next Page: Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page: Toggles the page view to one or two pages. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. Zoom In: Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out: Zooms out from the page view Close: Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC, the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

83

Working With Pages

84

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Popup Pages

Working With Popup Pages

Overview
Popup pages are similar to pages in some respects as they are a container for buttons, they may have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination, and contain only one state. Beyond these properties popup pages have many typically button specific properties, as well as some special properties that apply only to popup pages. Popup pages, unlike pages, can be assigned a border style and border color, as well as left, top, width or height values. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width.

Creating a Popup Page

TPD4 features the Popup Draw tool, which allows you to quickly create new popup pages, in a way that is similar to drawing new buttons. Refer to the Using the Popup Draw Tool section on page 87 for details.

1. Select Panel > Add Popup Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Popup Page dialog (FIG. 73).

FIG. 73 Add Popup Page dialog

2. Enter a descriptive name for the new popup page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name
characters - see the Inappropriate File Name Characters section on page 29).

3. Click the down-arrow to open the Border Style drop-down menu, and click to select the desired border
style for the popup page.

4. In the Position fields, enter Left and Top coordinates (in pixels, relative to the upper-left corner of the
page which is 0,0) for the desired placement of the popup page when it displayed on the panel. Use the Position fields when you need to achieve exact positioning. You can also set it's position manually by dragging it wherever you want it to appear. To position the Popup manually, you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. You must first select a Popup Page (in the Workspace window) in order to enable the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. Once the Popup is displayed on the page, you can click and drag to position it manually.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

85

Working With Popup Pages

Note that once you specify the position of the Popup on the page, any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option), the Popup will always appear in the position specified, regardless of the page that you display on.

5. In the Size fields, enter the desired Width and Height dimensions (in pixels) for the popup window.
Popup Pages may be created in any size beyond the minimum and up to the maximum size of the panel.

The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width.

You can also set the dimensions manually by dragging the sizing handles on the Popup. To resize the Popup manually, you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. This option opens the Select Popup Pages to Show dialog, where you can select the Popup Page that you want to display on the page. Once the Popup is displayed on the page, you can click and drag the red handles on the Popup to resize it manually. Note that once you resize the Popup on the page, any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option), the Popup will retain the dimensions specified, regardless of the page that you display on.

6. Set the Page Background color: a. Click the browse button (...) next to Fill Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog (FIG. 74).

FIG. 74 Colors dialog

b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Note the current and new color selections are shown
together for comparison on the right side of the dialog.

7. Set the Border color: a. Click the browse button (...) next to Border Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog. b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Note the current and new color selections are shown
together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.

8. Set the Text color (for text applied directly to the popup page): a. Click the browse button (...) next to Text Color to open the Colors dialog. b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Note the current and new color selections are shown
together for comparison on the left side of the dialog.

86

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Popup Pages

9. Set the Font Name and Size. a. Click the browse button (...) next to Font to open the Choose Font dialog (FIG. 75).

FIG. 75 Choose Font dialog

b. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the Sample window. 10. Use the Group drop-down list to assign the newly created popup page to an existing group, if desired. 11. Click OK to add the new Popup Page to the active project. The new Popup Page will be displayed in the
Workspace Navigator Pages folder, under the project to which the page was added. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index, you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. In most cases, any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle, since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly.

Using the Popup Draw Tool

The Popup Draw Tool (FIG. 76) allows you to draw Popup Pages directly onto a page.

FIG. 76 Popup Draw Tool

The technique is similar to drawing a button, and the result is the same as through standard means:

1. Select Edit > Popup Draw Tool (or click the toolbar button) to activate the Popup Draw tool.
To access the Popup Draw toolbar button, click and hold the Button Draw tool (in the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) for one second to open the drop-down menu containing the Popup Draw tool.

2. Left-click inside the desired page (in the active Design View window), and while holding the left mouse
button down, drag to draw the popup page to the desired size and shape. The minimum popup page size is 15 pixels in height or width. When using the Button Draw or Popup Draw tools, hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the item to a square. When using the Selection tool, hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

87

Working With Popup Pages

When using the Selection tool, hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it, as opposed to clicking on the item. With an item selected in a Design View window, hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size.

3. Upon the creation of a popup page, you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the popup that
are small yellow squares with red interiors. This is a visual indication that the newly created popup has the Edit Focus.

4. The General tab of the Properties Control window displays general (non-states related) properties for the
popup page in a editable table. Use this table to set the popup page's general properties.

5. The Programming tab of the Properties Control window displays programming-related properties for the
popup page in a editable table. Use this table to set the popup page's programming properties.

6. The States tab of the Properties Control window displays state-related information for the new popup in a
editable table. Edit the (Off) state properties as desired.

7. Select File > Save to save your changes.

Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index, you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. In most cases, any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle, since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly.

Setting Popup Page Properties

Popup Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Control Window. To set Popup Page-level properties, click on the Popup Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). With the Popup Page selected, the Properties Control window displays the properties available for the Popup Page, separated into three tabs (General, Programming and States).

Setting General Properties: Popup Pages

Use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. The General tab contains a table that lists the properties for the active popup page. To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following general properties are supported at the popup page level: Name Left Top Width Height Reset Pos. On Show Group Timeout Modal Show Effect Show Effect X/Y Pos Show Effect Time Hide Effect Hide Effect X/Y Pos

88

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Popup Pages

Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages

Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. The Programming tab contains a table that lists program-related properties (Address and Channel Port/Channel Code assignments) for the active popup page. To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following programming properties are supported at the popup page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code

Setting States Properties: Popup Pages

Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page state properties. The State tab contains a table that lists the state properties for the active popup page. To edit any of the listed button properties, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following state properties are supported at the popup page level: Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Video Fill Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

89

Working With Popup Pages

Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages

Once a popup page is displayed on a main Page in the Design View, you can utilize several of the Drawing Assist tools available via the Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars and the Layout menu to edit the size and position of the popup page (FIG. 77).

Position Assist Tools toolbar

Size Assist Tools toolbar FIG. 77 Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars

With only the popup page selected, you can use the Center Horizontal and Center Vertical, the Size to Image tool (if an image has been placed on the popup page), all five border tools (if a border has been applied to the popup page), as well as apply any of the options from the Aspect Ratio tool. With the selection of one or more buttons on the page in conjunction with a popup page selection, all of the existing Drawing Assist tools are available to allow you to size and align their popup page(s) with existing buttons on the page.

Renaming a Popup Page

To rename any Popup Page in the active project, simply click on a Popup Page entry in the Workspace and type directly into the text field (FIG. 78).

FIG. 78 Renaming a Popup Page

Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page

1. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (...)
button (FIG. 79).

FIG. 79 States tab of the Properties Control window - Fill Color field

3. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog, and select the color that you want to apply to the
Popup Page.

4. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.

90

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Popup Pages

Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page

You can apply a bitmap directly to a Popup Page in your project, to serve as the background image.

1. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace - Pages
tab).

2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (...)
button.

FIG. 80 States tab of the Properties Control window - Bitmap field

3. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select the desired bitmap.
Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog.

4. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. 5. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the
justification of the image on the Popup Page.

FIG. 81 States tab of the Properties Control window - Bitmap Justification field

Select Absolute to manually position the image.

6. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Popup Page. To scale an image to fit a target Page/panel, open the image in any graphics editor program, and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page/panel. To check the size of the Popup Pages in your project, check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.

Adding an Icon to a Popup Page

You can apply an image Icon directly to a Popup Page in your project, to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)).

1. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (...)
button.

FIG. 82 States tab of the Properties Control window - Icon Slot field

3. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select the desired icon. If you
don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog, you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

91

Working With Popup Pages

4. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification
of the image icon on the Popup Page.

FIG. 83 States tab of the Properties Control window - Icon Justification field

Select Absolute to manually position the image.

5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

Adding Text to a Popup Page

Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text.

Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state), you can display text directly on a Popup Page in your project. If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Popup Page, the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap, unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206).

1. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace - Pages tab). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Text field to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 84).

FIG. 84 States tab of the Properties Control window - Text field

Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog, and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). Alternatively, you can type directly into the Text field. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text.

Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text, if any exists.

3. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 85).

FIG. 85 States tab of the Properties Control window - Text Color field

Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Popup Page text.

4. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (...) button
(FIG. 86).

FIG. 86 States tab of the Properties Control window - Font field

92

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Popup Pages

Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).

5. Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the
text on the Popup Page (FIG. 87).

FIG. 87 States tab of the Properties Control window - Text Justification field

Select Absolute to manually position the text.

6. Click Word Wrap, and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Popup
Page (Yes or No - FIG. 88).

FIG. 88 States tab of the Properties Control window - Word Wrap field

If you select No, any text that won't fit on the selected Popup Page may not be visible, depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Popup Page.

Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page

TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page, Popup Page or Button. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page:

1. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. 2. In the Properties Control window - States Tab, click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available
video sources. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. 89):

FIG. 89 States tab of the Properties Control window - Video Fill field

3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.

Creating Popup Page Groups

Popup Page Groups provide a mechanism to group popup pages into mutually exclusive groups for display purposes. To create a Popup Page group:

1. Select a popup page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). 2. In the Properties Control window (General tab), click Group to activate the text field (FIG. 90).

FIG. 90 States tab of the Properties Control window - Group field

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

93

Working With Popup Pages

3. Enter a name for the popup group folder. 4. The named Popup Group folder is created under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator
Pages tab (FIG. 91), .

FIG. 91 Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator

5. To place a popup page in a particular popup group:

In the Workspace Window, drag the desired popup page(s) into the desired group folder or set the group association via the Group field in the Properties Control window (FIG. 92).

FIG. 92 States tab of the Properties Control window - Group field

To remove a popup page from a group, select the popup page in the Workspace Navigator, and drag it out of the group, or set the Group field to None in the Properties Control window.

Copying/Pasting Popup Pages

Copying Popup Pages
You can copy a popup page either by selecting a Popup Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window, or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar).

Pasting Popup Pages

You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied popup page onto: (1) an active Design View (2) the panel name in the Panel Navigator (3) the folder named Popup Pages Pasting a popup page onto another page or popup page in the Panel Navigator (which is only a paste target for buttons) or onto the folder named Pages (which is for pages only) is not allowed.

Deleting Popup Pages From a Project

To delete a popup page from the active project, select the popup page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab), and select Edit > Delete. The program will prompt you to verify the popup page deletion first.

94

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Popup Pages

Show/Hide Popup Pages

The Show Popup Page and Hide Popup Page options can be selected via the Page menu, the Workspace Navigator context menu or the toolbar buttons contained in the Main toolbar (FIG. 93). The Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button is available on the Main toolbar only.

FIG. 93 Main Toolbar - Show Popup Page, Hide Popup Page & Hide All Popup Pages buttons

This option deals only with showing a popup page (selected in the workspace) on a page that is currently open in the design view. To show a Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab), and select Show Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). To hide a selected Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab), and select Hide Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). To hide all Popup Pages: Select Hide All Popup Pages in the Page menu, Design View context menu, or click the Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button. Additionally, you can drag and drop a Popup Page from the Workspace Window onto a Design View window to show the selected Popup Page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

95

Working With Popup Pages

96

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Working With Buttons

Overview
TPDesign4 supports the following button types: General: Basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions, not associated with any specific functionality. Multi-State General: Basic multi-state buttons that can also be used for most touch panel functions, and support up to 256 states. Multi-state buttons are used to create animation effects. Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Multi-State Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels, and support up to 256 states. Multi-state bargraph buttons also allow you to create custom bargraph sliders. Joystick: Vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases), there is no On state associated with them. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. Text Input: Intended only to display (non-interactive) text on the panel. Computer Control: Allow you to connect to a PC running a VNC server for remote control applications. TakeNote: Allow you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. List Box: Utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list. List box buttons can be used to allow end-users to view data in list form, and select from the list (see List Box Buttons).

Button Draw Tools

Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tools drop-down (FIG. 94):

Button Draw Tool Popup Draw Tool List Box Draw Tool FIG. 94 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar

Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to select from the other types of Draw Tools: Button Draw Tool - Select to draw buttons (all types, except List Box buttons). Popup Draw Tool - Select to draw Popup Pages. List Box Draw Tool - Select to draw List Box Buttons.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

97

Working With Buttons

Drawing a Button
Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tool. Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to access a drop-down of the other types of Draw Tools (FIG. 95):

Button Draw Tool

FIG. 95 Button Draw Tool (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar)

Alternatively, select Edit > Button Draw Tool from the main menu.

1. Select the Button Draw Tool (used for all button types other than List Box Buttons). 2. Open the Page (or Popup page) that the button will be added to, and place your cursor within the
boundaries of an open Design View.

3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally. You will see a sizing rectangle as you
drag the mouse, indicating the size of the button you are drawing (FIG. 96).

FIG. 96 Drawing a New Button

Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the button to a square. With an item selected in a Design View window, hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. Minimum button size is 4 x 4 pixels.

4. To complete the button draw action, release the left mouse button (FIG. 97).

FIG. 97 New Button

The maximum number of buttons per page / popup page = 500. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. The Button Selection/Draw toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. To toggle between Off and On states, single-click the State button. When using the circle, oval or diamond border types, you may notice the slider bar appearing partially outside of the button border. This is a result of scaling the button smaller than what the selected border requires to accommodate the slider bar. If you see this, try using a "smaller" border (i.e. try using "Circle 50" rather than "Circle 100"). Experiment with different border types to get the results you're after.

5. Upon the creation of a button on a page (or popup page) you will see selection handles appear on the
outsides of the button that are small yellow squares with red interiors, indicating edit focus.

6. Use the fields and options in the General, Programming and States tabs of the Properties Window to
specify general, programming, and state-specific properties for the selected button. Refer to Properties Window for details.

98

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

7. Select File > Save to save your changes. 8. Select View > Button Preview to preview the button (click Push to simulate a button press) in the Button
Preview window (FIG. 98):

FIG. 98 New Button - Button Preview window

Generated Button Names

When new buttons are created, by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project). However, TPD4 goes further in automatically generating a descriptive name for the button, based on the text and/or bitmap applied to the button: If you apply text to the button, the button text is substituted for the button number. For example if you create a new button (which is automatically named "Button 9"), then add the text "Welcome", note that the button is automatically renamed to "Welcome". Note that this name change occurs on the fly, and does not require a Save operation. Text on a button always overrides the presence of a bitmap. If there is text associated with a button, and you add a bitmap, the button name will not change. However, if the button has no text, when you apply a bitmap to the button, the button is automatically renamed to reflect the bitmap file name (i.e. "Background"). Additionally, if there is text associated with a button and you add an icon, the button name will not change. However, if the button has no text, when you apply an icon to the button, the button is automatically renamed to reflect the icon's name. Note that if you change the text, the button is again renamed to reflect the updated text. Furthermore, any time you change the bitmap or the text on the button, the button name is automatically updated with either the latest text or bitmap assignment. This is where the Lock Button Name option (General tab of the Properties Control Window) comes into play. By default, the Lock Button Name option is set to Off. At any point in the design process, click Lock Button Name and select Yes to prevent the button from being automatically renamed by the program when you edit the text or bitmap assignment(s). However, Lock Button Name does not prevent you from manually renaming the button, via the Name field.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

99

Working With Buttons

Specifying the Button Type

To specify the button type for any button:

1. Select or a create a button. 2. In the General tab of the Properties Window, select Type to access the drop-down menu of Supported
Button Types (FIG. 99).

FIG. 99 Button Type drop-down menu (General Property)

3. Select the desired button type.

Specifying a Button Border

To specify a border style for a button, select the button in the Design View window, and select a border style from the Border Name (State) Property (FIG. 100):

FIG. 100 Border Name drop-down menu (State Property)

If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Border Style.

Adding Text to a Button

Since button text is a state-specific property, you can add or change the button text via the States tab of the Properties Control window:

1. Select the button to which you want to add or change text (with the Selection tool). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Text field in the state that you want add
the text to. This enables the browse (...) button (FIG. 101).

FIG. 101 State Properties - Text

3. Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog (FIG. 102), and type the button text as desired.
Alternatively, you can type directly into the Text field.

100

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

FIG. 102 Enter Text dialog

You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. You can also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing button text, if any exists. Button text is state-specific, so keep in mind wether you want the text to occur on all states, or only on specific states. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window, so use the Text field in the state that you want to change, or use the Text field under All States to add the text to every state in the button.

4. Click anywhere outside of the Text field to set the button text (or click OK to close the Enter Text dialog). Foreign Language Support for Text
For page and button state text properties, TPD4 supports non-complex scripts (those that can be printed correctly without the use of a rendered script) to the extent that the True Type font currently selected for that state supports the language in question. The size of the font required to support the language (particularly in the case of East Asian languages that utilize ideograms) might be prohibitive due to limits of available memory on the target device. If the size of the font exceeds the memory available on the device, the panel designer may be forced to use a pre-rendered graphic to display the desired text. TPD4 (and the G4 firmware itself) do not provide explicit support for languages that utilize complex scripts. These languages include (but are not limited to) Arabic, Hebrew, and Devangari. In order to display such languages on a page or button state, the panel designer must create a pre-rendered graphic of the desired text (using a suitable graphics application) that can then be imported into the TPD4 panel project as a graphic (icon or bitmap). Once imported into the panel project, the graphic can be assigned to one or more page or button states.

See the True Type Font Support section on page 6.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

101

Working With Buttons

Adding a Fill Color To a Button

Since Fill Color is a state-specific property, you can add or change the button Fill Color assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window:

1. Select the button to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (with the Selection tool). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want
add the Fill Color to. This enables the browse (...) button (FIG. 103).

FIG. 103 State Properties - Text

Button Fill Colors are state-specific, so keep in mind wether you want the Fill Color to occur on all states, or only on specific states. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window, so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change, or use the Fill Color field under All States to add the Fill Color to every state in the button.

3. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog, and select the color that you want to apply to the
Button/State (FIG. 104).

FIG. 104 Colors dialog

4. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. Changing the Button Fill Color
Since button fill color is a state-specific property, you can add or change the button fill color via the State tab of the Properties Control window:

1. Select the button that you want to add or change the fill color on (with the Selection tool). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want
to change the fill color on. This enables the browse button (...). Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window, so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change, or use the Fill Color field under All States to change the fill color on every state in the button.

102

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

3. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog, where you can change the fill color. 4. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.

Adding a Bitmap to a Button

Since bitmap assignment is a state-specific property, you can add or change the button bitmap assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window:

1. Select the button to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (with the Selection tool). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Bitmap field in the state that you want
add the bitmap to. This enables the browse (...) button (FIG. 105).

FIG. 105 State Properties - Bitmap

Button bitmaps are state-specific, so keep in mind wether you want the bitmap to occur on all states, or only on specific states. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window, so use the Bitmap field in the state that you want to change, or use the Bitmap field under All States to add the bitmap to every state in the button.

3. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select the desired bitmap
(FIG. 106).

FIG. 106 Select Resource dialog

Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

103

Working With Buttons

4. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the
justification of the image on the button (FIG. 107).

FIG. 107 State Properties - Bitmap Justification drop-down menu

Select Absolute to manually position the image.

5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Button. To scale an image to fit a target Button, open the image in any graphics editor program, and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Button. To check the size of the Buttons in your project, check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there.

Adding an Icon to a Button

With TPD4, you can apply Icons to buttons in your project, to serve as the foreground image (see Z-Order for details). Since Icon assignment is a state-specific property, you can add or change the button Icon assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window:

1. Select the button that you want to add an Icon to (with the Selection tool). 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window, click on the Icon Slot field in the state that you want
add the icon to. This enables the browse (...) button (FIG. 108).

FIG. 108 State Properties - Icon Slot

Button icons are state-specific, so keep in mind wether you want the icon to occur on all states, or only on specific states. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window, so use the Icon Slot field in the state that you want to change, or use the Icon Slot field under All States to add the icon to every state in the button.

3. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select the desired icon
(FIG. 109).

104

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

FIG. 109 Select Resource dialog

If you don't see the desired image file listed in the Select Resource dialog, you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position.

4. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification
of the icon on the button (FIG. 110).

FIG. 110 State Properties - Icon Justification drop-down menu

Select Absolute to manually position the image.

5. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

105

Working With Buttons

Working With Transparent Backgrounds

When you are applying an icon, you can take advantage of transparency support in TPD4. Typically transparency is used in images for the background color, to accommodate layering of images without trying to match colors across layers. Raster images are always created in the shape of a rectangle. However, by making the background color transparent, you can effectively change the shape of the image. For example, if you have a button with an image (FIG. 111):

FIG. 111 Button With Image

and you apply an icon that doesn't use transparent as the background color, you'll wind up with something like this (FIG. 112):

FIG. 112 Button With Image and Icon

Obviously you don't want that unsightly box framing the icon! You need to edit the icon's fill color and make the background color transparent. With a transparent background color, the icon actually retains its original rectangular shape, but will display without the background (FIG. 113):

FIG. 113 Button With Image and Icon using transparent background

Check the documentation for your image-editing program to learn about applying transparency to your images. Generally speaking, you will apply a fill to the areas that you want to appear transparent (in most cases the background), and select transparent as the fill color, just like you would for any other color in the palette. When using images with transparencies in TPD4, there are a few key concepts to understand: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4, only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4, the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Unless you are actually using transparency, JPGs are recommended over PNGs, since they are usually slightly smaller in size.

106

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Displaying a Video Source on a Button

TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page, Popup Page or Button. To apply a video fill to a Button:

1. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. 2. In the Properties Control window - States Tab, click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available
video sources (FIG. 114).

FIG. 114 Video Fill drop-down menu (State Property)

The Video Fill options presented will depend on the panel type selected for this project. Since this is a state-oriented setting, be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. To apply the video fill across all states, use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). Alternatively, you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window.

3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button.

Adding Text Effects

To add a text effect to a button, select the button in the Design View window, and select a text effect from the Text Effect (State) Property (FIG. 115):

FIG. 115 Text Effect drop-down menu (State Property)

For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Text Effect.

Page Flips
A basic touch panel page design concept is the Page Flip. A page flip is a button attribute that allows the user to press a button to "flip" through different panel pages. A basic example would be a button labeled "DVD Player" on a main page that when touched, opens a DVD Player page, containing only buttons that control the DVD player. Typically you would set up a different control page for each piece of equipment. Organization of device controls is essential to good touch panel design, and page flips allow you to separate, organize and cross-link your control pages.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

107

Working With Buttons

Creating a Page Flip 1. Select a (or create a new) button. 2. In the Properties Control window (General tab), click on Page Flip to enable the editable field. 3. Click the browse button (...) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog (FIG. 116).

FIG. 116 Button Page Flip Actions dialog

4. Click the Add command button to create a new page flip for this button, and access a drop-down list of
Page Flip Actions (FIG. 117). See the Page Flip Actions section on page 109.

FIG. 117 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Page Flip Actions drop-down menu)

5. Depending on the type of page flip action selected, you may need to also specify the target page, popup
page or popup group to open. Click the down arrow in the Target column to select the target of the selected Page Flip Action (FIG. 118).

108

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

FIG. 118 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Target page selection)

6. Repeat this process as desired to create multiple page flips on the button.
You can apply multiple page flips to any button. Use the up and down arrows to re-arrange the order of the page flips if necessary. TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab), drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Alternatively, you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Control window (General tab). By default, dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action, and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. If dragged with the right mouse button, the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions.

Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips

TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab), drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Alternatively, you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Window (General tab). By default, dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action, and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. If dragged with the right mouse button, the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions.

Page Flip Actions

With a button selected in a Design View window, click Page Flip in the Properties Control window (General tab) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog, where you can set the type of page flip to apply to the selected button, and specify the target page. Click the Add command button to access the Page Flip Actions drop-down list which allows you to select from a list of available page flip actions: Standard Page - This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. Select a target page for the page flip. Multiple Standard page flips are allowed. Previous Page - This selection sets the page flip to go to the previous page (relative to the order of existing page flips) when the button is touched. Show Popup - This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to show when the button is touched). Hide Popup - This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

109

Working With Buttons

Toggle Popup - This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to toggle hide/show when the button is touched). Hide Popup Group - This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup page groups in your project. Select a target popup page group for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). Hide Popups on Page - This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. Select the page that you want to hide the popups on when the button is touched. Hide All Popups - This selection sets the page flip to clear all popup pages when the button is touched. Page Flip Forget - This selection flips to the page specified, but does not retain the source page in the page flip stack (which is used to execute previous page flips). Use this option when you do not wish to return to the page that initiated the page flip when a subsequent previous page flip action is performed. This allows the user start on page one, flip to page two, flip to page three, then with a previous page flip go directly back to page one. Multiple Popup actions like Toggle popup, Show Popup and Hide Popup for the same Popup Page are allowed on the same button.

Copying/Pasting Buttons
The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons, bitmaps, even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. This means the last thing selected, which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows. For example, if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port", and you perform a "Copy", then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window, and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window, you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field, since it is not a valid Address Port number.

Copying Buttons
Copying a button or buttons from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired buttons in an active Design View window then either selecting Edit > Copy from the main menu or by clicking the Copy button in the main toolbar.

Pasting Buttons
You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied button or buttons onto: (1) a page or popup page name in the Workspace Navigator window - Pages tab (no open Design View window required) or (2) the active Design View window. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette, the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project, this can cause color shifting on the button. If, when copying buttons from a page to a popup page, the location or dimensions of the copied buttons exceeds the boundaries of the target popup page, the pasted items will attempt to maintain their size, only adjusting the properties required for them to properly fit on the target popup page.

110

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Editing Button Properties

Edit Button Properties via the Properties Window: select the button property that you wish to modify, and enter (type or select) a new value in the corresponding field. Once a property has been modified, either press the Enter key, the Prev or Next button, or left click the mouse in any box other than the current box to apply the change. If the value is inappropriate for the selected object, you will be notified via a message, and the previous value will be replaced in the box.

Editing Multiple Selections

Buttons may be acted upon individually by clicking the Selection Tool from the toolbar or selecting Edit > Selection Tool from the main menu, then clicking on the desired button. You can also select multiple buttons, using any of the following techniques: Hold the Shift key and left-click. Click and drag outside the boundaries of the desired buttons to perform a marquis selection. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey, or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages, you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. You can de-select a button by either selecting another button, or by left-clicking on the background of the page or popup page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

111

Working With Buttons

General Buttons
General buttons are basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions, and are not associated with a specific functionality, as opposed to other button types, which have specific functionalities.

FIG. 119 General Properties: Type (General button)

Setting Properties: General Buttons

Once you have created a General button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for General buttons: General Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

112

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Multi-State General Buttons

Multi-State General buttons are basic multi-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions, and that support up to 256 states. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects.

FIG. 120 General Properties: Type (Multi-State General button)

Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons

Once you have created a Multi-State General button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State General buttons: Multi-State General Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style State Count Animate Time Up Animate Time Down Auto-Repeat Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

113

Working With Buttons

Level Control Parameters

The Level Control Type options (set in the Programming tab of the Properties Control Window) allow General and Multi-State General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute, Relative or None): Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. These options require the following additional parameters to be defined: Level Control Parameters
Level Port: Level Code: Level Control Value: Select or enter the port to which the Level code will be applied. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. Select or enter the level code sent to the master on the selected port. Select AutoAssign to automatically assign the level code to this button. For Absolute level control, this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. For Relative level control, this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. For relative level control, this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). Range Low: Range High: Level Control Repeat (Relative Level Control only): Set the bottom of the level range (0-255). Set the top of the level range (0-255). This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for relative level control. For example, if this value is set to 1000, the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2).

Range Time Up: Range Time Down:

114

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Bargraph Buttons
Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels.

FIG. 121 General Properties: Type (Bargraph button)

Setting Properties: Bargraph Buttons

Once you have created a Bargraph button, you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/ edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for Bargraph buttons: Bargraph General Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Value Direction Slider Name Slider Color Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

115

Working With Buttons

Multi-State Bargraph Buttons

Multi-State Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels, and that (like Multi-State General buttons) support up to 256 states. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. Multi-State Bargraph buttons also allow you to create a custom bargraph slider (using an image icon).

FIG. 122 General Properties: Type (Multi-State Bargraph button)

Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons

Once you have created a Multi-State Bargraph button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State Bargraph buttons: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style State Count Disabled Hidden Value Direction Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

116

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Slider Types
There are several slider types available for use with Bargraph buttons, selectable via the General tab of the Properties Control window):

FIG. 123 Slider Types

Slider types are not available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Formatting Codes
Formatting codes can be used in the Text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons. The following formatting codes will be replaced with the identified values: $P - level percentage $V - raw level value $L - range low $H - range high $A - adjusted level value (raw level value - range low) $R - range (range high - range low) $$ - $ character

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

117

Working With Buttons

Creating a Custom Slider

Multi-State Bargraph buttons work differently than regular Bargraph buttons. Note that when you draw a Multi-State Bargraph button, that there is no slider indicated on the button (in the Design View window). Also note that unlike regular bargraph buttons, there are no slider-oriented settings to make in the Properties Control window. This is because multi-state bargraph buttons, like multi-state General buttons, use up to 255 states to animate the button action. In the case of Bargraph buttons, you'll be animating a change in levels as opposed to a push/release, as on Multi-State General buttons. Rather than assign a prepared slider, like you would for a normal Bargraph button, you can animate an icon across the states to serve as a custom slider. Custom sliders on Multi-state Bargraph Buttons work on the panel basically the same as regular sliders. You adjust a level, you touch the bargraph button and move the slider up and down (or side to side on a horizontal Bargraph button). To create a custom slider:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Create a Multi-State Bargraph button. Select State 1 in the Properties Control Window (States tab), or in the State Manager window. Apply a Icon Slot assignment to State 1. Set the Icon Justification to Absolute. In the Icon X Offset state property, click the Browse button (...) to open the Image and Text Positioning dialog (FIG. 124).

FIG. 124 Image and Text Positioning dialog

6. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog, move the icon into the position that you want to be the "start
position" for the bargraph slider. The start position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the bottom of the bargraph (representing the minimum level setting).

118

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

One key difference between regular and Multi-State Bargraph buttons is the way they work on the panel. The button action is the same (press the bargraph slider and drag to adjust the level), but while regular bargraph buttons can be set as either horizontal or vertical, Multi-State Bargraph buttons are always oriented vertically. The user will always press and drag the slider up and down to adjust the level. Keep this in mind when setting up a custom slider. Always begin the icon animation starting (at State 1) at the bottom position, and ending at the top.

7. Add States to the button (up to 255 total), duplicating State 1 (containing the icon). Generally, you'll want
to delete the "extra" state at the end of the sequence, which does not contain the icon (the original State 2 setting). FIG. 125 shows the State Manager Window with 10 states:

FIG. 125 State Manager Window (showing Multi-State Bargraph button with 10 states)

Keep in mind that the more states used to animate the movement of the icon, the smoother and more accurate the slider will be. The range of motion (i.e. the size of the button that the icon will travel across) needed for the slider should be taken in to consideration as well. A "short" bargraph button would require less states to create a smooth motion than a "long" one (that for example spans the entire touch panel page).

8. Select the last State in the Properties Control Window (States tab), or in the State Manager window. 9. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog, move the icon into the position that you want to be the "end
position" for the bargraph slider. The end position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the top of the bargraph (representing the maximum level setting). When you close the Image and Text Positioning dialog, the icons new position in the last State is indicated in the State Manager window (FIG. 126):

FIG. 126 State Manager Window (new Icon position for final State)

10. In the State Manager window, Ctrl+click to select just the first and last states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

119

Working With Buttons

11. Right-click on either of the selected states and select Slot Position from the Tweeners sub-menu. The
results of the tweening are displayed in the State Manager window (FIG. 127).

FIG. 127 State Manager Window (showing tweened Icon Position)

To preview the custom slider in action, open the Button Preview window, and click and drag the cursor up and down within the button to move the slider up and down. Remember, you can also utilize the other tweeners in conjunction with the custom slider to create complex color transition effects. See the Working With Animation Effects section on page 223.

Working With Touch Maps

TPD4 supports Touch Maps for Multi-State Bargraph buttons. Touch Map images allow you to use irregular shapes for active bargraph buttons. If you select Touch Map as the Value Direction (General property), an additional state property is enabled (displayed directly below Value Direction in the Properties Control window) called Touch Map (FIG. 128).

FIG. 128 General Properties - Touch Map

Click the browse button (...) next to Touch Map to select an image to use as a Touch Map (via the Resource Manager). The alpha values in the selected image represent the areas where touch will be registered, and the red-channel values represent the overall value to change the control to.

120

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Joystick Buttons
Joystick buttons are vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation).

FIG. 129 General Properties: Type (Joystick button)

Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases), there is no On state associated with them. Joystick buttons only use the Off state, as is reflected in the State tab of the Properties Control window.

Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons

Once you have created a Joystick button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for Joystick buttons: Joystick Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden Cursor Name Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Aux Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

121

Working With Buttons

Text Input Buttons

Text Input buttons are intended for user-input (using the on-screen keyboards) on the panel.

FIG. 130 General Properties: Type (Text Input button)

Text Input buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers.

Setting Properties: Text Input Buttons

Once you have created a Text Input button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for Text Input buttons: Text Input Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Character Display Type Max Text Length Input Mask Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Font Text Text Effect

122

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Input Mask Characters

The following table lists the available input mask characters, and which characters each input mask allows in any given position (for use with the Input Mask property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Characters
0 9 # L ? A a & C Digit (0 to 9, entry required, plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed). Digit or space (entry not required, plus and minus signs not allowed). Digit or space (entry not required; plus and minus signs allowed). Letter (A to Z, entry required). Letter (A to Z, entry optional). Letter or digit (entry required). Letter or digit (entry optional). Any character or a space (entry required). Any character or a space (entry optional).

Input Mask Ranges

Input Mask Ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric values for a given field. Only one range is allowed per field and the use of a range implies numeric entry only. The following table lists the available input mask ranges (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Ranges
[ ] | Start Range End Range Range Separator

Input Mask Next Field Characters

Input Mask Next Field Characters allow the user to specify a list of characters that caused the keyboard to advance the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the test into the text input area. The following table lists the available Input Mask Next Field characters (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Next Field Characters
{ } Start Next Field List End Next Field List

Input Mask Operators

Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in various ways. The following table lists the available Input Marks Operators (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Operators
< > ^ Causes all characters to be converted to lowercase. Causes all characters to be converted to uppercase. Sets the overflow flag for this field.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

123

Working With Buttons

Computer Control Buttons

Computer Control buttons provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server, allowing you to control the PC via the Touch Panel interface (for remote control purposes).

FIG. 131 General Properties: Type (Computer Control button)

Computer Control buttons are constrained to one of three predefined sizes (640x480, 800x600 or 1024x768). Computer Control buttons support password protection separate from any additional username/ password credentials that the user may require to access the remote system once the connection has been made. Computer Control buttons only use one state: Off.

Computer Control buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers.

Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons

Once you have created a Computer Control button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for Computer Control buttons: Computer Control Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Disabled Hidden Remote Host Remote Port Password Color Depth Compression Scale To Fit TakeNote Enabled Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Fill Color Text Color Overall Opacity

124

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

TakeNote Buttons
TakeNote buttons work in conjunction with G4 Computer Control to provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server, allowing you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels.

FIG. 132 General Properties: Type (TakeNote button)

TakeNote buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers.

Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons

Once you have created a TakeNote button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for TakeNote buttons: TakeNote Buttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden TakeNote Host TakeNote Port Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

125

Working With Buttons

Setting Default New Button Parameters

Use the Drawing toolbar to set the default new button parameters (FIG. 133).
Button Type Border Type Font

Toggle On/Off State properties

Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color

FIG. 133 Drawing toolbar

The settings that are specified in this toolbar become the default settings for all new buttons, until the settings are changed. This way, you can quickly create sets of buttons that are visually consistent. This toolbar is normally at the top of your screen and provides you with a mechanism for controlling various elements of future button creation. This toolbar can either be free floating or docked, but cannot be docked in a vertical fashion, as the drop down lists contained on the toolbar do not support this type of docking. On the extreme left side of the toolbar, you will see a button that will allow you to toggle the default choices for both the Off and the On state of a button. You can control the button type, border family, font, font size, button fill color, border color and text color. To set new button parameters:

1. Select the Button Draw tool from the Selection/Draw toolbar (FIG. 134). When the Button Draw tool is
selected, the Drawing toolbar becomes activated.

Button Draw Tool

FIG. 134 Draw Tools (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar)

2. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. The Drawing toolbar allows you to control certain new button
creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button.

3. Click the down-arrow on the first drop-down menu to the right of the State button to select the Type of
button you want to create (default = general). This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons, until the Button Type selection is changed.

4. Click the down-arrow on the second drop-down menu (to the right of the Button Type drop-down) to
select a Border Style for the button. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons, until the Border Style selection is changed.

5. Use the next two drop-down menus to specify a Font and Font Size as the default text attributes for new
buttons. These selections become the default text settings for all subsequent buttons, until the Font and Font Size specifications are changed.

6. Click the down-arrow on the first palette button (see FIG. 133) to set the Border Color for the button.
Again, this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons, until the Border Color setting is changed.

7. Click the down-arrow on the second palette button (see FIG. 133) to set the Fill Color for the button. This
selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons, until the Fill Color setting is changed.

8. Click the down-arrow on the third palette button (see FIG. 133) to set the Text Color for the button. Of
course, this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons, until the Text Color setting is changed.

126

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Using the Drawing Assist Features

The Order Assist, Position Assist and Size Assist toolbars contain shortcuts to many layout and design control options for controlling various elements of existing button(s) size and position.

Order Assist toolbar

FIG. 135 describes the tools in the Order Assist toolbar:
Send To Back Send To Front

Shift Up Shift Down FIG. 135 Order Assist toolbar

Send to Front/Send To Back - When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page, use these commands to place the selected button(s) to either the top or bottom layer on the page. Shift Up/Shift Down - When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page, use these commands to shift the selected button(s) up and down just one layer on the page (as opposed to placing them on just the top or bottom layer).

Position Assist toolbar

FIG. 136 describes the tools in the Position Assist toolbar:
Align tools Horizontal Spacing tools

Center tools FIG. 136 Position Assist toolbar

Vertical Spacing tools

Align: Left, Horizontal Center, Right, Top, Vertical Center, Bottom - Use the Align commands to quickly align selected buttons on the page, relative to each other (not relative to the area of the page). Choose which Align tool to use based on the shape and size of the selected buttons, and the desired design effect. You must select at least two buttons to enable the Align options, and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Center Horizontal/Vertical - Use these commands to quickly center one or more selected buttons either Horizontally or Vertically on the page. Horizontal Spacing (Equal, Increase, Decrease, Remove) - Use these commands to control the horizontal spacing between selected buttons. To distribute buttons evenly on the page, select equal spacing, then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options, and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Vertical Spacing (Equal, Increase, Decrease, Remove - Use these commands to control the vertical spacing between selected buttons. To distribute buttons evenly on the page, select equal spacing, then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options, and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

127

Working With Buttons

Size Assist toolbar

FIG. 137 describes the tools in the Size Assist toolbar:
Make Same tools Make Ideal For Border Increase Height/Width for Border tools

Size To Image Aspect Ratio FIG. 137 Size Assist toolbar

Make Same Width/Height/Size - Select a button that has the width or height that you want to match, then select the button(s) that you want to resize, and click one of these commands. All selected buttons are resized to match the width or height of the controlling button (the first button selected). Size To Image - Select a button that has either a bitmap or icon image assigned to it, and click Size To Image to automatically resize the button to the same size as it's associated bitmap or icon. Note that the border uses some of the interior area of the button. Depending on the size of the button, and the selected border type, Size To Image may appear to resize the button to be too small to display the entire image (because part of the image is hidden, or cropped by the border style). As a design concept, try to choose button border styles that accommodate and compliment the button image (if there is one). For example, the Circle and Oval border types are more problematic in terms of potential image cropping than are rectangular borders (assuming the associated image is rectangular). Aspect Ratio - This tool allows you to set the aspect ratio (for use with video fills). Click this button to select from the drop-down menu: 4:3 Video 16:9 Letterbox Video 16:9 Anamorphic Video 1.85:1 Letterbox Video 1.85:1 Anamorphic Video 2.35:1 Letterbox Video 2.35:1 Anamorphic Video Make Ideal For Border - This command automatically resizes the selected button(s) to the smallest size possible that still accommodates the selected border. This option is typically for use with the Circle, Oval and Diamond border types. For example, if you create a button with the border "Circle 150", and draw a circle that is smaller than 150 pixels in diameter (or not perfectly round), the resulting button will not appear as a perfect circle. Click this command to resize the button to become a perfect circle. Increase/Decrease Width/Height For Border - These commands are like nudge controls for button width and height. Click these buttons to adjust the button width/height in increments specific to the selected border. Note that since all measurements in TPD4 are zero-based, the Increase/ Decrease Width commands will always adjust the width on the right side of the selected button(s), and the Increase/Decrease Height command will always adjust the height on the bottom side of the selected button(s).

128

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog

To access this dialog, you must have more than one button selected (in a Design View window). Use the options in this dialog to align and/or resize the selected buttons. Select Layout > Alignment & Sizing to access this dialog (FIG. 138).

FIG. 138 Alignment & Sizing dialog

The options in this dialog include: Alignment - These options allow you to align the selected buttons horizontally, vertically (or both) along either the centers of the buttons, or along any edge (top, bottom, left or right). Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. Horizontal - select the type of horizontal alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). left edges: Aligns the left edges of all selected buttons. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. right edges: Aligns the right edges of all selected buttons. left edges to right: Aligns the left edges of selected buttons to the right edge of the button that was selected first. right edges to left: Aligns the right edges of selected buttons to the left edge of the button that was selected first. left to right spacing: Aligns the left edge of the first selected button to the right edge of the next selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. right to left spacing: Aligns the right edge of the first selected button to the left edge of the next selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Offset - The horizontal alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 - the horizontal measurement of the selected panel in pixels). Default = 0. Positive values offset the selections to the right, negative values offset them to the left. Vertical- select the type of vertical alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). top edges: Aligns the top edges of all selected buttons. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. bottom edges: Aligns the bottom edges of all selected buttons. top edges to bottom: Aligns the top edges of selected buttons to the bottom edge of the button that was selected first. bottom edges to top: Aligns the bottom edges of selected buttons to the top edge of the button that was selected first.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

129

Working With Buttons

top to bottom spacing: Aligns the top edge of the first selected button to the bottom edge of the next selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. bottom to top spacing: Aligns the bottom edge of the first selected button to the top edge of the next selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Offset - The vertical alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 - the vertical measurement of the selected panel in pixels). Default = 0. Sizing - These options allow you to resize the selected buttons to make them match in width, height or both. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. Make Same Width - Resizes all selected buttons to match the width of the button that was selected first. Change - specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections width (positive values add pixels, negative values subtract). Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. Make Same Height - Resizes all selected buttons to match the height of the button that was selected first. Change - specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections height (positive values add pixels, negative values subtract). Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally.

Previewing a Button
The Button Preview Window allows you to preview a button so you can check size, border, text and color settings on a Push and Release of the button. To preview a button:

1. Select the button that you want to preview. 2. Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. 139).

FIG. 139 Button Preview window

Like the other windows in TPD4, the Button Preview window is fully dockable, but initially it opens undocked. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Initially the button is shown in its Off state.

3. Click on the Push button.

Button Preview is not available for Joystick buttons. Button Preview for List Box Buttons is only supported for a selected child button in unmanaged mode, but will not have any data linkage. In this case, Button Preview functions the same as for a General button with no text or graphics.

130

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

Creating a Date Button

A Date Button is a button that displays the current date on the panel. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. To create a date button:

1. Create a new button. The button can be of any type, but normally you would use the General button type. 2. In the Programming tab of the Properties window, click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down
menu.

3. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. 140).

FIG. 140 Address Port = 0-Setup Port

4. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. 141).

FIG. 141 Address Code drop-down menu

5. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Date Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to
choose from (FIG. 142).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

131

Working With Buttons

FIG. 142 Address Code - Date Display drop-down menu

6. Select the desired display format (Weekday, dd/mm/yyyy, yyyy-mm-dd, etc).

Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel.

Creating a Time Button

A Time Button is a button that displays the current time on the panel. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. To create a time button:

1. Create a new button. The button can be of any type, but normally you would use the General button type. 2. In the Programming tab of the Properties window, click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down
menu.

3. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. 143).

FIG. 143 Address Port = 0-Setup Port

4. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. 141).

132

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Buttons

FIG. 144 Address Code drop-down menu

5. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Time Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to
choose from (FIG. 145).

FIG. 145 Address Code - Time Display drop-down menu

6. Select the desired display format (24-hour, Standard or Standard AM/PM).

Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

133

Working With Buttons

134

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With External Controls

Working With External Controls

Overview
TPD4 supports editing the properties for programmable external controls for panels that feature external pushbuttons and LEDs (including R-4 remote controllers). You can edit external control properties on both a panel-wide basis and on a page specific buttonby-button basis. The global, panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs, which may be selected like any other button for editing. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). TPD4 supports copying and converting external controls between panels: When copying a page between panels, or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons, the configuration of the source external controls are copied to the destination controls according to the type of control (general, LED, cursor up, cursor down, cursor left, cursor right, or cursor select).

External Button Options

The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons, the External Button Options list is empty, i.e. "<none>". If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons, the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote, the options include: Default Configuration - for use with a standard MIO R-4. Keypad with Transport Functions - for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. Teletext keypad - for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions - for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. As with the panel resolution, this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.

Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels

TPD4 supports copying and converting the properties for programmable external controls (external pushbuttons and LEDs) for NXD-CV5, NXD-CV7, MVP-7500, and MVP-8400 panels. The global, panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs, which may be selected like any other button for editing. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

135

Working With External Controls

When copying a page between panels, or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons, the configuration of the source panel's external controls are copied to the destination panel's controls according to the type of control (general, LED, cursor up, cursor down, cursor left, cursor right, or cursor select.

Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs

TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons). Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel, which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls.

Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons

Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls (pushbuttons and LEDs) are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window).

1. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of
the external controls on the target panel, which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties.

2. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View
Window).

3. Once you have selected an external button, you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window
to set/edit general external control properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following global button properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.

Setting Global Properties for External LEDs

TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons and LEDs). Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel.

136

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With External Controls

Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls (buttons and LEDs) on the target panel, which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. The following global button properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs - Supported Properties
General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.

Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs

Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons
Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.

1. Double-click on a Page entry (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window) to display the
selected page in a Design View Window.

2. Select Pages > Show External Controls to change the Design View to represent the layout of the external
buttons on the target panel.

3. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View
Window).

4. Once you have selected an external control, you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window
to set/edit general button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the righthand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following page-specific properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons - Supported Properties
General Properties Override Global Settings Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command, string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.

Override Global Settings - This option (Yes/No) determines if the button performs the global action defined for the button, or if its behavior is specific to this page. If set to Yes, the remainder of the external buttons properties will indicate their global values as read-only (default = No).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

137

Working With External Controls

Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs

Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with. The following page-specific properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs - Supported Properties
General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.

138

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

Working With List Box Buttons

Overview
TPD4 supports adding "List Box" buttons to projects created from panel types that support List Box buttons. The List Box button is a special-purpose button type for G4 devices/panels which utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list (referred to as a "list box view"). List box buttons can be used to allow the end-user to view data in list form, and make selections from the list. The data displayed in List Box buttons comes from an associated List Data Table. List Box buttons are visible in TPD4, but do not have any visible properties on the panel. The primary role of the (hidden) list box button is to retain the properties of the list box view. The role of the subordinate buttons is to display the data in the list box view. One example usage for List Box buttons might be to display a scrollable list of music playlists for the end-user to select and playback. In this case, the song titles displayed in the list box buttons are provided by a server, such as a MAX Home Theater server. Unlike other button types where you specify the text to be displayed on the button (via the Text button state property), the text that is displayed in a List Box button comes from a List Data Table. Each List Box button is associated to a List Data table, and you can specify how the List Box button displays the data (via General and State Button Properties). In many ways, List Box buttons are set up like tables in TPD4, in that they use Rows and Columns to organize the data to be displayed. Think of a table where each cell is a button, and every button is populated with data coming from the List Data Table associated with the List Box button. There are three main aspects to List Box buttons: the Container button, Subordinate buttons and the List Data table: The main List Box button is referred to as the Container. Select the List Box Container to set button properties for the entire list box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). The List Box Container wraps around the Subordinate buttons which represent the display fields for data populated by the List Data Table. You can select subordinate buttons by the column to set button properties that affect only the affected column. Note that you cannot select individual "cells" (or buttons), since subordinate buttons only operate as a display of list data, not as individually customizable buttons. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. List Data Tables are created in TPD4, via options in the Edit List Tables dialog. The List Data Table is the data source for list box buttons, and can be defined statically or dynamically. Further, TPD4 supports two modes for List Box buttons - Managed and Unmanaged: Managed Mode: In managed mode TPD4 treats the List Box button as a Container for the Subordinate buttons. It also presents properties for the list box button and properties for each column. Subordinate buttons appear in a grid fashion. Strict alignment and spacing rules are forced both by the view and in the properties the user may edit. For example, individual button properties are not accessible. Instead, managed mode presents properties by column. Subordinate buttons are created by adding columns and/or rows to the list box container button. Once in unmanaged mode the only way to put the list box back in the managed mode is by using the Undo feature. Unmanaged Mode: You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. In unmanaged mode, you can select, move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons, but you cannot add or delete them.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

139

Working With List Box Buttons

The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary, and should be considered an advanced mode for seasoned programmers only.

G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons

At the time of this release, List Box button support is limited to the following G4 devices: MIO R-4 Remotes

List Box Toolbar

The List Box toolbar contains shortcuts to the Selection and Button Draw tools (FIG. 146).
Add Row Add Column Delete Column Delete Row

FIG. 146 List Box Toolbar

All toolbars in TPD4 are dockable, so they can be arranged within the application window. To undock any toolbar, double-click anywhere inside the toolbar (but not on a toolbar button). Double-click again to dock the toolbar. To move the toolbar, click and drag using the handle (the single vertical bar) at the far-left side of the toolbar. Select View>Toolbars>List Box Toolbar to show/hide this toolbar: Add Row: Click to add a row to the selected List Box Button. Add Column: Click to add a column to the selected List Box Button. Delete Row: Click to delete the last row from a selected List Box Button. Delete Column: Click to delete the selected column from a selected List Box Button.

List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode

When a List Box button is in managed mode, its subordinate buttons are managed strictly via edits performed on the list box button or its columns. In managed mode, you cannot individually select, create, or delete individual subordinate buttons. To create subordinate buttons, add columns and/or rows to the list box button. To delete subordinate buttons, remove columns and/or rows. Changing any properties such as colors, borders, or fonts for subordinate buttons are done on a column-by-column basis. In managed mode, you cannot move the subordinate buttons around individually, or modify their Z-Order. You also cannot access the channel port and code properties of the subordinate buttons. You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. In unmanaged mode, you can select, move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary.

140

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

List Box Buttons: Managed Mode

Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode)
By default, List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. To create a list box button:

1. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. 147):

List Box Draw Tool FIG. 147 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar

Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type.

2. Create a list box button by holding down the right mouse button on the view and dragging the mouse.
This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. 148):

FIG. 148 list box button with one subordinate button

By default the list box container is created with a transparent background and a white border. If the background color of the page is white, you will not see the container. You can select the container and change the border color to black. This property is only visible in TPD4 and will not appear on the panel. This way you can see the container (FIG. 149):

FIG. 149 list box button - showing container

3. In managed mode you add subordinate buttons by adding columns or rows to the list box. Select the List
Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar (see FIG. 146 on page 140). The example below shows a List Box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. 150):

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

141

Working With List Box Buttons

FIG. 150 List Box button with 2 columns and 3 rows

When the List Box Draw Tool is selected, the Drawing Tools toolbar can be used to set the border type, font, border color, fill color and text color for the on and off states of the subordinate buttons, when the List Box Button is created.

Adding Rows 1. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. 151).

FIG. 151 List Box button

2. Click the Add Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). This function adds a row to the bottom of the
list box container (FIG. 152).

FIG. 152 List Box button - 1 Row Added

The height of the row will be equal to the List Row Height (general) property of the list box container. The number of buttons added will be equal to the List Column (general) property. The width of each button is equal to the Column Width (general) property of each column in the list box. When a new row is added, each button will have the same state properties (i.e. Fill Color, Border Color etc.) as the button above it.

142

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

Adding Columns 1. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. 153).

FIG. 153 List Box button - 2 Rows

2. Click the Add Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). This function adds a column to the righthand side of the list box container (FIG. 154).

FIG. 154 List Box button - 1 Column Added

The width of the last column is used for the new column. If a column is selected, the new column will have the same width as the selected column. A column of buttons will appear on the right-hand side of the list and will contain the number of buttons equal to the List Row (general) property. The maximum number of column allowed in a List Box Button is 20.

Deleting Columns 1. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. 2. Click the Delete Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the right-most column in the
list box container. After deletion the container will be resized. If only one column exists, this function is disabled. If a column is deleted, and is part of the Column Display Order field of the parent, the Column Display Order field will be reset to "empty".

Deleting Rows 1. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. 2. Click the Delete Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the bottom-most row in the list
box container. If the preferred row is deleted, the preferred row property should be set back to 1. If only one row exists, this function is disabled.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

143

Working With List Box Buttons

Cutting, Copying and Pasting a List Box

Cutting, copying and pasting a managed list box works only when the list box container is selected by itself or when the list box container is selected along with other non-subordinate buttons. When one or more of the subordinate buttons are also selected, these features are no longer available. TPD4 takes care of copying, pasting and deleting all the subordinate buttons for you. All you have to do is select the container. TPD4 does not support copying and/or pasting individual columns of a managed list box.

List Box Buttons - Container Button

In Managed mode, TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button (FIG. 155).

FIG. 155 List Box Buttons - Container Button

Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). Alternatively, you can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected, as shown below (FIG. 156):

FIG. 156 List Box Button - Container Button Selected

144

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

List Box Container Properties vs. Column Properties

In Managed mode, properties are split into two perspectives:

1. The List Box button that contains all the subordinate buttons (called the List Box Container button)
presents properties that deal with the list box as a whole. These properties are viewed by selecting the list box Container (FIG. 157):

FIG. 157 List Box Button - Container Button Selected

2. The other perspective is based on columns of the list box. Managed mode will not allow you to select or
move buttons outside of the container. Instead, you select columns of the list box to change properties for all the buttons in that column such as button width, border type, fill color etc (FIG. 158).

FIG. 158 List Box Button - Column Selected

Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons

Once you have created a List Box button, you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General, Programming and State button properties. When a List Box Container is selected, the following Properties will appear in the Properties window. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both. The following button properties are supported for List Box Container buttons: If you select the List Box Container, only the Off state is indicated, since List Box Container buttons do not support multiple states. However, List Box button columns do support multiple states. If you select a List Box Button Column, additional state properties are supported.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

145

Working With List Box Buttons

List Box Container Buttons - Supported Properties

General Properties Type Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Hidden List Table Port List Table Address Column Display Order Column Sort Order List Table Wrap List Row List Column List Row Height List Preferred Row List Preferred Row Height List Column Padding List Row Padding List Offset Enabled List Managed Programming Properties Address Port Address Code States Properties Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity

Setting List Box Container Button Properties

Once you have created a List Box button, you can use the General, Programming, and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the container button.

1. Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within
the container). Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected, as shown in FIG. 159:

FIG. 159 List Box Button - Container Button Selected

2. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.
Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both.

146

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

There are additional properties that can be applied to a selected column within the Container button. See the Setting List Box Button Column Properties section on page 149 for details.

List Box Buttons - Subordinate Buttons

List box buttons and subordinate buttons have a special kind of relationship to keep track of which buttons belong to the list box button. The Z-Order of all subordinate buttons must follow list box button container and continue in sequential order from left to right, top to bottom. Each subordinate button's Channel Port must be set to the High Port of the list box button. The Channel Code of each subordinate button is set in sequential order starting with 1000 from left to right, top to bottom. The list box button's Row and Column properties are set to the total number of rows/columns. The subordinate button's Row and Column property is set to their row/column position. The List Box Button's Address Port and Code must be set to an Address Port/Code of a List Data Table. The list Box Button's Data Display property is a string surrounded by parenthesis. The string is a comma-delimited list of List Table Column Values. For example, if the list box's 1st 2nd and 3rd columns are assigned to columns 3, 4 and 1, then this property would be set to 3,4,1 (FIG. 160):

FIG. 160 List Box Buttons - Subordinate Buttons

Subordinate Button Placement

In managed mode, the placement of subordinate buttons in a list box is automatic and controlled by the location of the list box container and laid out in a grid fashion. Rows are added to the bottom of a list box and columns are added to the right-hand side of a list box. When a row or column is added, the list box container is resized automatically to fit the new region of subordinate buttons added.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

147

Working With List Box Buttons

Subordinate Buttons - Drag and Drop Capability

Full drag and drop capability is supported for Subordinate List Box buttons: You can drag a column property of a list box and drop it on another column of a list box. The list box column will highlight when dragged on top of the column in the Design View and when dropped the property will change to the value dragged from the properties window. You can also drag and drop one to two states in the State Manager window on a column of a List Box.

List Box Buttons - Columns

In Managed mode, TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button. You can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. Alternatively, select the Container to set button properties for the Container List Box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). Click inside the Container to select a column. The (blue) handles indicate that a single column is selected, as shown below (FIG. 161):

FIG. 161 List Box Button - Middle Column Selected

Setting Properties: List Box Columns

Once you have created a List Box button, you can use the General, Programming, and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the columns.

List Box button columns support multiple states. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both.

148

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

List Box Columns - Supported Properties

General Properties Type Name Description Width Above Popups Border Style Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output States Properties Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity

Note: All of the above are available only for Bitmap Justification unmanaged list boxes. Managed list boxes Scale Bitmap To Fit do not have any programming Icon Justification properties available. Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat

Setting List Box Button Column Properties

Once you have created a List Box button, you can use the General, Programming, States tabs of the Properties Control window to set/edit button properties for a selected column (within the List Box button container). Properties applied to a column will affect all buttons in that column. List Box buttons consist of a container and subordinate buttons that are created with Columns and Rows. If you select a column within the container (as opposed to the List Box button container itself), you can set button properties that apply specifically to the selected column. There are additional properties that can be applied to the List Box button container. See the Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons section on page 145 for details. To edit any of the properties in the table, click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected, you can either set the item manually, select from a drop-down menu, or both.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

149

Working With List Box Buttons

List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode

When a List Box button is created, it always defaults to Managed mode. You can choose to place a selected List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). Note that once a List Box button has been moved to unmanaged mode, the only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is via Edit > Undo. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. In unmanaged mode, you can select, move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons, but you cannot add or delete them. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. When a List Box button is put into Unmanaged mode: The Container, and individual subordinate buttons can be selected, moved and resized. If the Container is deleted, all of the subordinate buttons will be deleted as well. However, individual (or multiple selection) subordinate buttons can not be deleted. Rows and Columns cannot be removed nor added. The Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Container/Subordinate buttons cannot be changed. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button, the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. In other words, the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. This logic is present for managed list boxes. By removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not, this functionality will carry over to unmanaged list boxes. Only certain button properties are available to edit in unmanaged mode: List Box Buttons - Unmanaged Mode - Editable Properties
Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button General Properties Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height List Table Port List Table Address List Display Column Sort Order List Filter Column List Selectable List Table Wrap List Preferred Row Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button General Properties Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Border Style

150

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

List Box Buttons - Unmanaged Mode - Editable Properties (Cont.)

Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output State Properties: Off only Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity State Properties: Off only Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Bitmap Justification Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Justification Font Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat

Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons

The following rules apply to List Box Buttons in Unmanaged Mode: Must be constructed from a Managed List Box (create a Managed List Box Button and change it to Unmanaged mode via the Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox) option). Unmanaged transition is one-way. The only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is to use the Undo feature. Parent and individual child buttons can be selected. Parent and individual child buttons can be moved and resized. The parent can be deleted -> all children will be deleted as well. Individual (or multiple selection) child buttons can not be deleted. Rows cannot be removed nor added. Columns cannot be removed nor added. If the user tries to delete one or more list box child buttons, a message box is given stating the reason it can not be deleted. Changing Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Parent/Child is not available. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button, the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. In other words, the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. This logic is present for managed list boxes. By

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

151

Working With List Box Buttons

removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not, this functionality should carry over to unmanaged list boxes. State properties of individual unmanaged list box button can be changed. The High Port of a parent can not be changed via properties. The Channel Port/Code of a child can not be changed via properties.

Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode)

By default, List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created.

To create a list box button:

1. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. 162):

List Box Draw Tool FIG. 162 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar

Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type.

2. Create a list box button by right clicking on the view and dragging the mouse. This will create a list box
button with one subordinate button (FIG. 163):

FIG. 163 list box button with one subordinate button

3. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box
Toolbar. The example below shows a list box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. 164):

FIG. 164 List Box Button With 2 Columns and 3 Rows

4. Select Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox).

152

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

5. The program displays a warning message concerning the rules concerning unmanaged mode:
Once set, the List Box cannot be set back to managed mode except through the Undo feature. In unmanaged mode you can resize and move individual subordinate buttons of the list box but you cannot add nor delete rows and columns.

6. Click Yes to convert the List Box Button to unmanaged mode.

List Box Buttons - Resizing

When a List Box Container is resized by dragging the center handles, the change in size is split evenly between each row by adding/subtracting the change in size to the Row Height and Preferred Row Height properties of the Container (FIG. 165).

FIG. 165 List Box Buttons - Resizing

If the change in size specified by the drag is not equally divisible by the number of rows, the remainder is applied to the Preferred Row Height. If Preferred Row is 0, the remainder is dropped. The minimum height for each row is 4 pixels, plus the offset of the parent if the List Offset Enabled (General) property is set to "yes". Use the corner resize handles to do a combination what the center handles do by resizing one of the corners. If the List Preferred Row is set to a non-zero value (i.e. 1), up to the number of rows present in the list box, resizing maintains the size ratio of the preferred row vs. the other rows. When a List Box Column is selected, only the right center handle is enabled for resizing (FIG. 166).

FIG. 166 Right center handle enabled for resizing

When a single column is selected (not including the last column) resizing is limited to the width of the selected column and the next column to the right. After resizing the column, the next column to the right will resize to reflect the change. If the last column is selected, resizing is limited to the size of the last column plus the width left on the right hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup. This allows you to change the overall width of the list box. When two or more columns are selected, the maximum width allowed per column is the amount of width from the right-hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup divided by the

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

153

Working With List Box Buttons

number columns selected. When resized in this way, the new width is applied from right-to-left until the maximum width is met. When resizing the width of a column, the minimum allowed is 4 pixels.

List Box Buttons - Z-Order

In order for a list box to function correctly on a panel, the Z-Order (or State Draw order) of the subordinate buttons must follow the list box container's Z-Order in row-column sequential order. For managed list boxes the Z-Order is managed for you when rows and/or columns are added, deleted, pasted, or when the list box layout is changed (bring-to-front, send-to-back, etc.). A managed list box's Z-Order cannot be interrupted by another buttons Z-Order (i.e. a button separate from the list box cannot be behind some of the subordinate buttons of the list box and on top of the rest of the subordinate buttons - it is either behind or on top of the entire list box). For unmanaged list boxes, you can manipulate each subordinate button of an unmanaged list box. Even though you can individually select buttons in unmanaged mode, Z-Order placement remains managed by the list box. Only experienced programmers who fully understand list box construction and the logic of Z-Order placement should use the list box in unmanaged mode.

Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons

When the List Box Draw Tool is selected, the Drawing toolbar (FIG. 167) can be used to set the border, fill and text color for the List Box button's subordinate buttons, at the time that the button is created.
Button Type Border Type Font

Toggle On/Off State properties

Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color

FIG. 167 Drawing toolbar

When you draw a List Box button with the List Box Draw Tool, you can use the Drawing Tools Toolbar to specify the border type, font, border color, fill color and text color for the On and Off states of the subordinate buttons, when the List Box Button is created. When you add columns and rows (with the List Box Button Container selected), the colors are defined via the Drawing Tools Toolbar; the width of the new column is defined based on the last column in the list box. If you select a column, then click the Add Column button (in the List Box Toolbar), the properties (including width) of the new column are taken from the selected column.

List Box Buttons - Navigation Buttons

General buttons can be used to provide a means for the user to control a List Box button. These buttons are referred to as List Box Navigation buttons. Here are the actions that a list box navigation button can perform (selectable via the Channel Code property). Up - Move list up one entry. Down - Move list down one entry. Page Up - Move list up one page. Page Down - Move list down one page. Home - Move list to top of page. End - Move list to end of page. Sort Column (1-20) - Sort the specified column. On first press, the specified column is sorted alpha-numerically in descending order. Press again for an ascending re-sort.

154

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

FIG. 168 illustrates a List Box (in white), five navigation buttons (in cyan) and a scroll bar (in yellow):.

FIG. 168 List Box with Navigation Buttons

Creating List Box Navigation Buttons 1. Add a general button to the page and set the Channel Port to the List Box and set the Channel Code to the
desired function. For example, the three large cyan button in the figure above could be used to sort columns of the list box.

2. All three button's Channel Port should be set to the List Box (via the Properties Control - Programming
Tab - assuming that at least one List Box button is defined in the project).

3. The first button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 1". 4. The second button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 2". 5. The third button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 3".
The smaller cyan buttons, one above and one below the yellow button could be set to scroll the list box up and down:

6. Set both button's Channel Port to the List Box. 7. Set the top button's Channel Code to "Up" and the bottom button's Channel Code to "Down".
Alternatively you could leave these buttons out and program the external buttons (R4) to move the list up and down. If you haven't renamed any of the List Box buttons that have been added to this project, they will be listed as "List Box 1", "List Box 2", etc. See the SystemGenerated Project File Names section on page 30 for details.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

155

Working With List Box Buttons

Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar

One option for List Box Navigation Buttons is to link a single bargraph button to a Listbox for navigating the list data up and down. Set the Level Port of the bargraph to the list box and set the Level Code to "Scroll". Now you have two visual options: The first is depicted below (FIG. 169):

FIG. 169 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar - Level Code set to Scroll (option1)

The Off state fill color is set to white and the On state fill color is set to green. The user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list up and down. The second option (shown below) uses the slider property to indicate position (FIG. 170):

FIG. 170 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar - Level Code set to Scroll (option 2)

Both state fill colors for On and Off are set to white. Again, the user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list.

These bargraphs depict position only. The size of the list is not represented.

156

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar

The yellow button in FIG. 171 serves as visual feedback to indicate the list size and position. It does not have any navigation capability:

FIG. 171 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar

Scroll Bar Components

FIG. 172 shows that the yellow bargraph is actually made up of 3 bargraph buttons labeled bg1, bg2 and bg3:

FIG. 172 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar - Scroll Bar Components

Buttons bg1 and bg2 are called Mask buttons. They mask portions of button bg3 to visually indicate slider position and size. To set these buttons up as a list box scroll bar set the button properties as follows: Button bg1 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: bottom mask Off Button State: Fill color set to Transparent On Button State: Fill color set to yellow

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

157

Working With List Box Buttons

Button bg2 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: top mask Off Button State: Fill color set to yellow On Button State: Fill color set to Transparent Button bg3 is not connected to the list box. It is located behind buttons bg1 and bg2 and it's color will show through the transparent parts of bg1 and bg2 to represent the slider of the scroll bar. Button bg3 is not really needed. It could have been left out leaving the background color to show through as the slider.

Navigation Buttons - Channel Code Values

Channel Code values that can be applied to Navigation buttons (via the Channel Code Programming property) include: none - no navigation command will be associated with this button. Up - Move up one entry Down - Move down one entry Page Up - Move up one page Page Down - Move down one page Home - Move to Top of page End - Move to bottom of page Sort Column (1-20) - Enter the number of the column to use for alpha-numeric sorting (1-20). The Sort Column entries contain the column titles (up to 20 columns, supplied by the List Data Table). Once applied to a Navigation Button, the button will sort the list box based on this column selection. It is up to you to make sure a column exists in the table when defining a "Sort Column #". TPD4 displays these list values regardless of the panel type. However, TPD4 will save the "List" or "Selection" version of "Up, Down,..." automatically, based on whether the PPF says the panel type supports "Selection" (i.e. a panel without a touch overlay, such as the MAX AVP).

List Data Table

TPD4 supports the ability to create, edit and delete List Data Tables in support of List Box buttons. List Data Tables provide the information that is displayed on List Box Buttons. Since the purpose of List Box Buttons is to present data, a list data table is used to manage the data of a List Box Button and can be designated through a property of the List Box Button. This separates the data from the view so that List Data Table can be created statically or dynamically: TPD4 presents a list table view to create and define a static List Data Table. Once created, the table can be designated for a list box through a property of the List Box Button. You can also designate dynamic List Data Table data for a List Box Button that is created at runtime by the panel firmware. List Data Tables are created via options in the Edit List Table dialog (FIG. 173), and it's associated dialogs:

158

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

FIG. 173 Edit List Table dialog

List Data Table Properties

The following list data table properties are editable: Table Name - The Name is a character value used to identify the list table data. Table Address Port - The Address Port property is an integer value representing the port of the list data table. Table Address Code - The Address Code property is an integer value representing the address code of the list data table. Table Type - Select either a static or a dynamic table type. A dynamic table type is updated dynamically from the master with data. Therefore, no raw data will be entered by the user.

Static List Box Data

A static list box populates button information based on data stored on the panel. Note that unlike Dynamic List Box data, the device cannot display current state information provided by the master. Conversely, the device will resume the last known static table event should power be cycled.

Dynamic List Box Data

Dynamic List Box data populates button information based upon communications between the panel and a NetLinx Master. Opposed to static data, the information displayed on the device is on the master and not the device. Dynamic List data must be included in the NetLinx code running on the NetLinx Master in order to be available for use on List Box Buttons.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

159

Working With List Box Buttons

Dynamic tables are great for creating parameters for displaying changing options, i.e., date, time or temperature; however, if the device loses power it will not be able to display the last known states.

Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button

Once you have created a list Box Button, as well as a List Data Table, you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. There are two variations on this concept: Static List Box Data, which populates the associated List Box Button with the data entered into a List Data Table via the Edit List Tables dialog. See the Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 163. Dynamic List Box Data, which populates the List Box Button dynamically, with data defined in NetLinx Code. See Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 171.

Creating a Static List Data Table

To create a Static List Data Table and associate it to a List Box Button, so that the data in the List Data Table is displayed in the List Box button:

1. If you haven't already done so, create a new List Box button, with enough rows and columns to
accommodate the data that you will enter into the List Data Table.

2. Select Panel > Edit List Tables (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit List Tables dialog
(FIG. 173 on page 159).

3. Click New to open the Create New Table dialog (FIG. 174), where you will specify basic properties for
the new table.

FIG. 174 Create New Table dialog

Name of Table: Type a unique name for the table. Number of Columns: Enter the number of columns to include in the table. Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to include in the table. Port: Assign a Port and Address for the table. See the Working With Function Codes section on page 207 for more information on Ports and Addresses. Address: Assign a Port and Address for the table.

4. Click OK to save your changes and proceed to the Column Types dialog (FIG. 175). Use the options in
this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog:

160

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

FIG. 175 Column Types dialog

Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu, to assign a specific type to each column. The following are the available column types to select from: Text - The column will contain a variable length text value. Icon - The column will display icons from a table of icon references. Bitmap - The column will display bitmap images from a table of bitmap references. Page Flip - The column will display valid page names that will be activated as page flips. This column is hidden from the user on the display and is used as navigation. Port/Channel Code - This column will contain a port/channel code combination that is sent to the master upon activation of a particular row.

5. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Edit List Tables dialog.
Note that the Table Data display reflects the columns/rows and column names that you specified. Also note that the table you just created is listed in the Tables list box (left side of the dialog). As you create more new tables, each one is added to the Tables list. You can select any table from the list to edit its properties.

6. At this point, use the command buttons along the top of this dialog to add/delete rows and columns from
the active table, resize the table, and specify a Port and Address to the table: Add Row - Click to add a row to the table. Delete Row - Click to delete one or more selected rows from the table. Add Column - Click to add a column to the table. This option invokes the Add List Table Column dialog (FIG. 176). Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

161

Working With List Box Buttons

FIG. 176 Add List Table Column

This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu, to assign a specific type to each column. The column type options include: Text (default) - Assign to columns that will be used to display text. Bitmap - Assign to columns that will be used to display bitmaps. Icon - Assign to columns that will be used to display icons. Channel Code - Assign to columns that will be used to display channel code information. Page Flip - Assign to columns that will invoke a page flip when selected.

7. Click OK to return to the Edit List Tables dialog.

Delete Column - Click to delete the column that currently has focus. Fit Table - Click to resize the table to fit inside the Table Data window. Expand Columns - Click to expand each column by equal amounts. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the maximum allowed width. Shrink Columns - Click to shrink each column by equal amounts. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the minimum allowed width. Port/Addr - Click to assign a unique Port and Address combination for the table. This option invokes the Change Port/Addr dialog. Use the Table Port and Table Address fields to specify the port/address combination. Rename Column - This option allows you to rename the column label at the top of a column. Power Assign - Click to open the List Table Power Assign dialog. Use the options in this dialog to set button-level actions, channel/variable text, and code parameters to one or more selected buttons.

8. Edit the cell data as desired: When you click inside a particular cell:
If column is of the type "Text", the user will be able to enter data. If the column is of the type "Page Flip", then a drop-down list of available pages is displayed. If the type is of the type "Channel Code", then you will need to enter a channel port/code combination value. If the column is of the type "Bitmap", you will be able to select a bitmap that has already been defined in the project.

162

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

If the column is of the type "Icon", you will be able to select an icon that has already been defined in the project. To move rows, select one or more rows and click and drag them to another spot in the table.

9. Now you will attach the List Data Table to a List Box Button - see Attaching a List Data Table to a List
Box Button section on page 160.

Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button

Once you have created a list Box Button, as well as a Static List Data Table, you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button.

1. In the Design View window, select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. 2. In the General tab of the Properties Control Window, click inside either the List Table Port or the List
Table Address fields. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (...) button. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 177).

FIG. 177 Attach Table To List Box dialog

3. This dialog lists all Static List Data Tables in your project. Select the table that you want to attach to the
selected List Box Button. Once a table is selected, the Table Port and Table Address fields are automatically updated with that table's port/address assignments.

4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

163

Working With List Box Buttons

Deleting a List Data Table

To delete a List Data Table from your project:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select Panel > Edit List Tables to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. 173 on page 159). Select the table that you want to delete, in the Tables list. Click the Delete command button. The program will prompt you to verify this action before the table deleted. Click OK to proceed.

Creating a Dynamic List Data Table

Dynamic List Data is provided to the associated List Box Button by the NetLinx Code running on the NetLinx Master that the panel is connected to.

1. Use Data List Commands to define List Data in your NetLinx Code. 2. Attach the Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button
There are two types of List Box Commands that can be used to define List Box Data in your NetLinx Code: Data List Commands Command Structure List View

Data List Commands

Data List Commands
^LDN Creates a new data list. Unique list addresses and names are handled programmatically. Syntax: "'^LDN-<list port>,<list address>,<column count>,<list name>'" Variables: list port = port where data resides list address = address where data resides column count = the number of data columns (includes hidden columns) list name = User specified name for the data list Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDN-5,1,4,my songs'" Creates a data list of 4 columns named "my songs" and places it at port 5, address 1. ^LDA Adds a new row to an existing data list. Primary data is required. List box commands contain comma-delimited fields, but you can use commas within the fields. Use double-quotes to surround fields in which commas are needed. Syntax: "'^LDA-<list address>,<uniflag>,<primary data>,<data2>,...'" Variables: list address = address where data resides uniflag = indicates unicode; 0 - No unicode, 1 - Uses unicode primary data = the "key" data column. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. data2 = variable, column data information. The number of data fields is limited only to the number of columns in the data list. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,Entry5,Meatloaf,Best of,Anything for Lunch'" Adds a text row to the data list located at address 1. The primary data is set as Entry5. Meatloaf, Best of, and Anything for Love are all cells within the new row.

164

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

Data List Commands (Cont.)

^LDR Removes a row from an existing data list Syntax: "'^LDR-<list address>,<uniflag>,<primary data>'" Variables: list address = address where data resides uniflag = indicates unicode; 0 - No unicode, 1 - Uses unicode primary data = the "key" data column. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDR-1,0,Entry5'" Removes the text row Entry5 from an existing data list at address 1. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166). ^LDC Clears all rows in a given list. Syntax: "'^LDC-<list address>'" Variables: list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDC-1'" Clears all rows in data list located at address 1. ^LDD Deletes the data list. Syntax: "'^LDD-<list address>'" Variables: list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDD-1'" Deletes the data list located at address 1. ^LDT Sets the column type for a data list. Column is the index of the first type to set, additional types sent are set in order. Syntax: "'^LDT-<list address>,<column>,<type>,<type>,...'" Variables: list address = address where data resides column = the starting column number type = subsequent columns. 0 - Text; 3 - Channel; 4 - Page Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDT-1,1,0,0,0'" Sets the column type for the data list located at address 1. The column type starts at column 1, the first column is Text, the second and third columns are also Text.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

165

Working With List Box Buttons

Data List Commands (Cont.)

^LDL Modifies the data in a single column field. This can be used to load a data list that has long text fields. Syntax: "'^LDL-<list address>,<column>,<uniflag>,<primary data>,<new cell data>'" Variables: list address = address where data resides column = the starting column number; numbering starts at 1 uniflag = indicates unicode; 0 - No unicode, 1 - Uses unicode primary data = the "key" data column. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. new cell data = data information for a single field or "cell" Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDL-1,1,0,Entry5,Music'" The field located in column 1, in the row with the primary data "Entry5" and in the data list located at the address of 1 is a text value of Music. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166).

Data List Command Rules

The following rules apply to several of the Data List Commands, as indicated in the Data List Commands table: Leading and trailing spaces are ignored before and after opening and closing double quotes. Double quotes must be the first non-space character after the previous delimiter (,) and the last nonspace character before the following delimiter (or end of command). Within double quotes, the backslash (\) is used as an escape character. This is to allow double quote literals within the string bounded by double quotes. When a backslash is parsed, the next character is read as a literal value and the backslash is discarded. There are 2 cases in which you would use the backslash to escape a double quote literal within the field, to escape another backslash (commas do not need to be escaped). Any data field that has a double quote literal as its first character MUST use double quotes to delimit the field, then use the backslash to escape the double quote literal.

166

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

Command Structure List View

Command Structure List View
^LVO Filter sort; tells the view which of the possible orderings to use. Note that the <sort> field is a bitmask, so that the 3 bit positions may be combined. Syntax: "'^LVO-<view address>,<sort>'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition sort: Bit 0x0001 - Sort Bit 0x0002 - Reverse Bit 0x0040 - Filter Reverse bit (0x0002) reverses the list from whatever order it is currently in. When used on a sorted list, it results in a reverse sort. When used on a reverse sorted list, it results in a forward sorted list. In most cases, the reverse bit should not be used alone, but should be used in combination with the sort bit (0x0003) such that it always results in a reverse sorted list. Possible values for the sort field: 0 = None 1 = Forward Sort 2 = Reverse the current list ordering (may or may not be sorted) 3 = Reverse Sort 4 = Filter 5 = Forward Sort + Filter 6 = Reverse current + filter 7 = Reverse sort + filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVO-1,7'" Displays the data list according to the view definitions located at address 1 and filters and reverse sorts the list. ^LVL Data list; set the data list displayed. Syntax: "'^LVL-<view address>,<list port>,<list address>'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition list port = port where list resides list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVL-5,2,1'" Sets the data list viewed to the information located at port 2, address 1 and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

167

Working With List Box Buttons

Command Structure List View (Cont.)

^LVP Set position; display a new position. Syntax: "'^LVP-<view address>,<index>'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition index = the row number in sequential order; numbering starts at 1 Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVP-5,3'" Sets the display position starting at the third row and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5. ^LVM Move; display a new position. Syntax: "'^LVM-<view address>,<offset>'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition offset = + / - numeric display shift Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVM-2,-4'" Shifts the display -4 and displays the list according to the view definitions located at address 2. ^LVS Sort; sets column order for sorting. Update must be called for changes to take effect. Syntax: "'^LVS-<view address>,<column>,<column>,...'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition column = the starting column number Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVS-3,5,2,1'" Sets the column sort order to column 5 first, then column 2 and then column 1. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3. ^LVC Column display order; sets the table column each view column displays. Syntax: "'^LVC-<view address>,<column>,<column>,...'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition column = the column number to display Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVC-3,5,2,1'" Sets the column display order to column 5 first, then column 2 and then column 1. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.

168

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

Command Structure List View (Cont.)

^LVF Filter; sets what column to use and what string to compare. Setting column to 1 or data to none makes the filtered ordering the same as sorted ordering. Update must be called for changes to take effect. Syntax: "'^LVF-<view address>,<uniflag>,<column>,<search data>'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition uniflag = indicates unicode; 0 - No unicode, 1 - Uses unicode column = the starting column number; numbering starts at 1 search data = the data on which to filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'LVF-1,0,2,Smith'" Filters list based on column 2 such that only those rows whose column 2 contains Smith are displayed. The data is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 1. Filter is case sensitive. ^LVU Update; this will update the view to any sort, filter, or list data changes. Syntax: "'^LVU-<view address>'" Variables: view address = the address of the view definition Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'LVU-3'" Updates the data list and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 3. Note: This must be called after changes to list data.

Dynamic List box Table Example

The following is an example of a dynamic List Box table as it appears in NetLinx code. See Listbox Commands for more information on Listbox commands. Dynamic List Box buttons require the same List Box navigation buttons as static tables do.
DEFINE_DEVICE Keypad = 11001:1:4 Keypad2 = 11001:2:4 KeypadMusic = 11001:10:4 DEFINE_EVENT BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad,5] { PUSH: { //Deletes any existing data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDD-1'" //Creates new 5-column data list at port 1, address 1 named "my music" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDN-1,1,5,my music'" //Specifies column types for the data list at address 1 starting at column 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDT-1,1,0,0,0,0,3'" //Adds rows to the data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,01,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Kissing the Lipless, "10,1"'"

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

169

Working With List Box Buttons

SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,02,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, "Mine's Not a High Horse", "10,2"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,03,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, So Says I, "10,3"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,04,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Young Pilgrim, "10,4"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,05,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Saint Simon, "10,5"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,06,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Fighting in a Sack, "10,6"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,07,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Pink Bullets, "10,7"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,08,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Turn a Square, "10,8"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,09,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Gone for Good, "10,9"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LDA-1,0,10,The Shins, Chutes Too Narrow, Those to Come, "10,10"'" //Sets the column number (4) to display in the view with address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVC-2,4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by title instead of Track number BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad,6] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. The 1 indicates forward sort. SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVO-2,1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 4 which contains titles) SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVS-2,4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by Track number instead of title BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad,7] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. The 1 indicates forward sort. SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVO-2,1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 1 which contains track numbers) SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVS-2,1'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad, "'^LVU-2'" } } BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,1] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,2] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,3]

170

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,4] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,5] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,6] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,7] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,8] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,9] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic,10] { PUSH: { SEND_COMMAND Keypad2, "'^TXT-1,0,[Track ',itoa(BUTTON.INPUT.CHANNEL),']'"

Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button

Once you have created a List Box Button, and defined List Data in your NetLinx Code (with Data List Commands), you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data to be displayed on the List Box Button.

1. In the Design View window, select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. 2. In the General tab of the Properties Window, click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table
Address fields. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (...) button. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 178).

FIG. 178 Attach Table To List Box dialog

3. Enter the Table Port and Table Address of the dynamic List Table. 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

171

Working With List Box Buttons

Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table 1. Open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. 173 on page 159), via Panel > Edit List Tables, or click the
toolbar button).

2. Select a List Data Table (in the Tables list). 3. Click the Port/Addr command button.
This opens the Change/Port Addr dialog (FIG. 164), showing the current Port/Address assignments for the selected table.

FIG. 179 Change/Port Addr dialog

4. Enter the new Port and Address assignments for this List Data Table in the Table Port and Table
Address fields at the bottom of this dialog.

5. Click OK to save the changes and close this dialog.

You can use the Power Assign feature in the Edit List Tables dialog to quickly assign Port and Channel information for multiple columns in the List Data Table, via the List Table Power Assign dialog.

172

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With List Box Buttons

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

173

Working With List Box Buttons

174

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Working With Properties

Overview
The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page, popup page and button properties, and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties Window. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace, the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below, the selected button is named "pause", and the button type is general. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button, and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General, Programming and States (FIG. 180).

FIG. 180 Properties Window

Drag and Drop Support

Properties from the General tab and states from the States tab can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page, or the Page itself). The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column, and drag it to another field. When you release the mouse button, the value is copied to the new location. With an item selected, the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value, and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field, TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog, and the original value is left unchanged.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

175

Working With Properties

Using the Apply To All option

The Apply To All button is located at the bottom of the Properties Window (FIG. 181).

FIG. 181 Apply To All button

Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. If the Apply To All button is not depressed, and you select more than one button to act on, the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected, only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on, the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons, provided that the change can be applied to them all. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others, you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections, but not on multiple states for a single button. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states, select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once, use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button).

Using the Prev and Next buttons

The Prev and Next buttons, located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page, and the Apply To All button is not depressed (FIG. 182).

FIG. 182 Prev and Next buttons

These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. When you have multiple buttons selected, only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus.

176

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Working With The Property Painter

The Grab Properties and Paint Properties tools work together with the Property Painter dialog to allow you to grab (copy) the properties of a selected Button, Page or Popup Page, and paint (copy) them onto another Button, Page or Popup Page:

1. Select Grab Properties Tool from the Edit menu, the Design View context menu, or click the toolbar
button to activate the Grab Properties tool (FIG. 183).

FIG. 183 Grab Properties Tool

2. Click on a Button or Page in a Design View window to take a snapshot of the properties and values of the
Button, Page or Popup Page that is clicked on. This action invokes the Property Painter dialog (also accessible via the View menu). The following example shows the Property Painter dialog invoked as a result of selecting a General-type button (FIG. 184).

FIG. 184 Property Painter dialog

3. In the Property Painter dialog, click the checkboxes to select the Properties of the selected Button, Page
or Popup Page that you want to grab. The set of selected properties (but not their values) may be named and saved for later use by entering a name in the Property Set text box. See Saving a Properties Set.

4. Click Grab Selected to grab (copy) the selected Properties. 5. With the Selection tool (FIG. 185), select another Button, Page or Popup Page in the Design View.

FIG. 185 Selection Tool

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

177

Working With Properties

Hold the Shift key and left-click to apply the properties to multiple selected Buttons.

6. Click Paint Selected to apply the properties that were "grabbed" from the first item to the selected item(s)
(FIG. 186).

FIG. 186 Property Painter dialog

Saving a Properties Set

Use the Property Set feature in the Property Painter dialog to save a set of Properties (but not their values) that can be recalled later.

178

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

General Properties
All General properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the General tab of the Properties Window:

Above Popups
This option allows you the selected button(s) on a Main page to always remain on top of any popup pages (Yes/No, default = No). This option is not available for buttons on a popup page.

Animate Time Down

The timer intervals between states as the button animates from the On to the Off state. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). This property is available for Multi-State buttons only.

Animate Time Up
The time intervals between states as the button animates from the Off to the On state. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). This property is available for Multi-State buttons only.

Auto-Repeat
Select wether to apply auto-repeat to the button. Auto-repeat causes the button to constantly cycle through its states (Yes/No, default = No). This property is available for Multi-State buttons only.

Border Style
To change the Border Style for the selected button, click Border Style, and select the desired style from the drop-down list There are several types of border styles to choose from, and they all can all be assigned to both popup pages and buttons.

Color Depth
Select the color depth to be applied to the button. The options are high-color (16-bit) or true color (24-bit). Default = high-color (16-bit) This setting should match that of the host PC. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.

Column Display Order

Enter a string of space-delimited integers to specify the order in which the columns in the List Data Table are displayed in the List Box button, from left to right.

FIG. 187 Column Display Order

For example, using a List Data Table that contains 5 columns, you could enter (without quotes) "3 4 5 2 1" to populate the List Box Button as follows: Column 1 on the List Box Button will display column 3 from the List Data Table. Column 2 on the List Box Button will display column 4 from the List Data Table. Column 3 on the List Box Button will display column 5 from the List Data Table.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

179

Working With Properties

Column 4 on the List Box Button will display column 2 from the List Data Table. Column 5 on the List Box Button will display column 1 from the List Data Table. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons, when a List Data Table is assigned, and a List Table Address and Port is assigned.

Column Sort Order

Specifies the column sort order for the list table data before populating the list box control. The value is a space delimited string of integers representing columns in the List Data Table. One or more columns can be specified. For example, if the user wishes to sort the table based on column 1, the value would be "1". If however the user wishes the table data to be sorted by column 3, then column 1, and finally column 5, the value would be (without quotes, with a space between each number) "3 1 5". Multiple column sorting is useful when a column contains duplicates or more than one cell is empty. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons, when a List Data Table is assigned, and a List Table Address and Port is assigned.

Compression
Select wether to compress the image on the button (Yes/No, default = No). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.

Cursor Color
Specify a color for the Joystick cursor. Click the browse (...) button to select a color from the Colors dialog. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.

Cursor Name
Select the desired visual style for the joystick cursor. Click the down arrow to select from the list of available cursor types. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.

Description
Use this text field to enter a general or functional description for this button. Click the browse (...) button to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the description.

Disabled
Indicates how the selected button will be rendered. If the button is set as Disabled (select Yes from the drop-down), the button will be rendered by the panel in a subdued state (default = No).

Display Type
Click to select the display type to be invoked by this Text Input button (single line or multiple lines). The default is single line. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only.

Group
Use this field to add the selected Popup Page to a specific Popup Page Group. This property is available for Popup Pages only. To add a group, type any value in the Group field. This will create a corresponding folder under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). To place a popup page in a particular popup group, simply drag the desired popup pages into the desired group folder. Click the browse (...) button to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the description.

180

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Height
Size values. The Height rows indicate the vertical dimensions of the selected button, in pixels. You can edit these fields to apply specific dimension info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page, these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions.

Hidden
Indicates wether or not the selected button is displayed on the panel. If the button is set as Hidden (select Yes from the drop-down), the button will disappear when transferred to the panel (default = No).

Hide Effect
This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page, to be invoked when the popup is closed (hidden). This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Hide Effect Time

This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the selected Hide effect, measured in 1/10th-second increments. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Hide Effect X/Y Pos

Measured in pixels, the Hide Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Hide Effect. Depending on the Slide Hide Effect selected, the Hide Effect X Pos. or Hide Effect Y Pos. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. If you have selected a left or right slide effect (including slide/fade effects), you can set the X position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 - 9999). The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). In some cases, depending on the page design and graphics, you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect (including slide/fade effects), you can set the Y position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 - 9999). The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page).

Input Mask
This field allows you apply a mask to user input on the panel. An input mask allows you to force the user to enter the correct type of characters (numbers vs. characters), suggest a proper format with fixed characters, to change or force character case, to create multiple logical fields that act as a single field, to specify a range of characters / numbers for each field, to set the input as required or optional, and/or fill the field from the right or the left. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. To define a literal, enter any character other than those shown in the topics above, including spaces and symbols. A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows to be displayed as the literal character. For example, \A is displayed as just A.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

181

Working With Properties

Left
Position values. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button, in pixels, relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page, these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position.

List Column
An integer value representing the total number of columns in the List Box button. This property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. A list box column contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same width, justified vertically. The number of subordinate buttons in a column depends on the number of rows defined for the list box. The width of the first column is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. At creation, one subordinate button is created automatically. The maximum number of columns that can be set/created is 10, and the minimum is 1.

List Column Padding

An integer value indicating the number of pixels between columns of buttons. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode.

List Display
A string formatted as a space-delimited list of table column numbers in a List Box Button that the columns of the List Data Table are assigned to. This button property is available for List Box buttons only, and only when a List Table Port is assigned.

List Table Port

An integer value representing the port of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Port number of a data table (static or dynamic). The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable), to open the Attach Table To List Box dialog. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog).

182

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

List Table Address

An integer value representing the address of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Address number of a data table (static or dynamic). The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable), to open the Attach Table To List Box Dialog. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog).

List Table Wrap

This property specifies a behavior for a list box when attached to two or more pages of table data. A page of table data is simply how much of the table data that can fit on the list box. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. If the user presses the scroll bar down button, the next page of data will show up in the list box. When set to "yes", List Table Wrap specifies that the list box will "wrap around" and start at the beginning again if the user presses the next page button when the list is at the end of the table data. The same goes for scrolling up. Scrolling past the beginning would wrap back around to the end of the list. In this way, the list becomes cyclical. If set to "no" (default setting), beginning and end limits are present for the list box, therefore scrolling would go no further than the beginning or end of the table data.

List Filter Column

This property sets the column order for filtering data. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is enabled only when a List Table Address and Port are assigned.

List Managed
This display-only field indicates wether the selected List Box Button is in Managed or Unmanaged mode. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.

List Offset Enabled

A flag (yes/no) indicating whether an offset of five pixels is applied to the List Box Container all the way around the subordinate buttons of the list box (default = on). It is used so that the List Box Container can be selected via the Design View. When set to no, the subordinate buttons will completely cover the list box container (unless List Row Padding and/or List Column Padding is set to a value greater than 0). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

183

Working With Properties

List Preferred Row

An integer value designating a particular row in the list box as the preferred row. The List Preferred Row value has the range from 0 to Row Count (default = 0). Zero "0" disables the preferred row functionality. If a row is specified (greater than 0) then the row has some special properties. First, it can have a different height specification than all the other rows through the Preferred Row Height property. This is useful for Panels like the R4 where the screen is very small. The height of one row bigger than the rest is needed for easy thumb access via the touch screen. Second, by enabling preferred row all marquee state properties (Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat) defined for each column are now exclusive to the preferred row. Marquee state properties are column-based properties. So even though a column's state has marquee enabled, only the cell in the preferred row implements the marquee feature on the panel. This button property is available for List Box Container buttons only.

List Preferred Row Height

An integer value indicating the height of the preferred row in the list box. Only the preferred row can have a separate height specification. All other rows are specified the same height. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode, and the Preferred Row is greater than zero "0".

List Row
An integer value representing the total number of rows in the List Box button. A list box row contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same height, justified horizontally. The number of subordinate buttons in a row depends on the number of columns defined for the list box. The height of the first row is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. At creation, one subordinate button is created automatically. The maximum number of rows that can be set/created is 50, and the minimum is 1. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with.

List Row Height

An integer value indicating the height (in pixels) of all the rows in the list box (i.e. the height of all the buttons) excluding the preferred row. This button property is available for List Box buttons in Managed Mode only.

List Row Padding

An integer value indicating the number of pixels between rows of buttons. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode.

List Selectable
This property is a value representing the current selection type: single or multi. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.

184

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Lock Button Name

This option controls how the name of the selected button is managed by the program (Yes/No, default = No). When new buttons are created, by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential two-part name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project) and button type, separated by a colon (i.e. "Button 1 : general", "Button 2 : multi-state general", etc). See the Generated Button Names section on page 99 for details.

Max Text Length

Use this field to specify the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered via this button. The range is 0-2000 (default = 0). This button property is available for Text Input buttons only.

Modal
This setting (Yes/No) controls the user's ability to press a button outside the boundaries of the popup page when the popup page is visible. This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Name
To give the button a specific name other than the default Button/Popup 1, Button/Popup 2, Button/Popup 3 etc., click Name in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the text field, where you can type the new name. You must use a unique name for each button, page and popup page, and you cannot apply the Job name (set in the New Project Wizard) to a page.

Page Flip
Use this option to assign a page flip (type and target page) to the selected button(s). Click the browse button (...) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. S See the Page Flips section on page 107 for details.

Password
The password supplied by the designer. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. This password must match the password entered into the PC remote desktop server.

Password Character
Type a single character to be used as the password to access this Text Input button on the panel. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only.

Password Protection
This option allows you to apply password protection to the selected button(s). You can set up to four passwords per panel; use this drop-down list to select which of four possible passwords to apply to the selection (none, password 1, password 2, password 3, or password 4).

Remote Host
The IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.

Remote Port
The port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. Default = 5900. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

185

Working With Properties

Reset Pos. On Show

If this option is turned on, the popup page will always appear at the position established during popup page design each time it is displayed. This might be desirable if the popup page contains a button which provides the end user with the ability to move the popup page at will. This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Scale To Fit
Select wether to automatically scale the image to fit the button (Yes/No, default = No). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. By default, scaling is disabled.

Show Effect
This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page, to be invoked when the popup is opened (shown). This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Show Effect Time

This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the Fade Hide effect, measured in 1/10th-second increments. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Show Effect X/Y Pos

Measured in pixels, the Show Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Show Effect. Depending on the Slide Show Effect selected, either the Show Effect X Pos. or Show Effect Y Pos. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. If you have selected a left or right slide effect, you can set the X position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 - 9999). The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). In some cases, depending on the page design and graphics, you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect, you can set the Y position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 - 9999). The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page).

Slider Color
Select a color to apply to the bargraph slider. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only.

Slider Name
Select the desired visual style for the bargraph slider from the list of Slider types. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only.

State Count
This field indicates the number of states currently associated with the selected button. This property is available for Multi-State (General and Bargraph) buttons only. To change the state count for the selected button, click inside the text field and enter the desired number. If the state count is increased, new states are added to the end of the set as a duplicate of the last existing state. If the count is decreased, states are removed from the end of the set. This feature allows the state count to be changed via Edit > Find & Replace and with the Paint Properties tool.

186

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

TakeNote Enabled
Select wether to enable TakeNote functionality on the selected Computer Control button (Yes/No, default = No). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.

TakeNote Host
Enter the IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only.

TakeNote Port
Enter the port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button (default = 1541). This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only.

Timeout
This property allows you to specify the Popup Page Timeout, in 1/10th second increments. Popup Page Timeout specifies how long a popup page will remain open and active without a button press (default = 0). This property is available for Popup Pages only.

Top
Left/Top - Position values. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button, in pixels, relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page, these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position.

Touch Map
Click the browse button (...) to select an image to use as the Touch Map image, via the Select Resource dialog. This button property is available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons only, and only if the Value Direction is set to Touch Map.

Touch Style
This selection drop-down allows you to set a "touch style" for the selected button(s). Touch style describes the way buttons behave when pressed, in terms of the shape and border style used. For example, by using transparencies you could create a button that appears to be round (although the actual shape of the button is rectangular), in which case you may not the button to respond if the user presses outside of the circular border. Active touch: This touch style limits the active touch area to the visible area of the button. Areas of the button that are totally transparent will not respond to a press. For example, if you created a totally transparent button with no border and an icon, only the icon would respond to a press. Similarly, if a transparent button has a visible border but no icon, only the border will respond to a press. Touching the transparent areas of the button does not active the button. Active Touch requires total transparency on the button in order to work. To make a button totally transparent, set the Overall Opacity (state) setting to 0. If Overall Opacity is set to any other value (for partial transparency), Active Touch will not work. Bounding box: This touch style forces the panel to respond to a press anywhere within the rectangular boundaries of the button (regardless of transparencies or border styles). Pass through: This style allows the user to press "through" one button to press another button underneath. If there is no other button underneath the pass through button, the user simply presses the page (with no resulting action).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

187

Working With Properties

Type
The Type (button type) defaults to the button type that was set when the button was created. To change a selected button's type, click Type in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the button type drop-down menu, containing a list of all available button types.

Value Direction
Click the down arrow to select the orientation of the bargraph. This property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. For non-multi state Bargraph buttons, the options are Vertical or Horizontal. For Multi State Bargraph buttons, the options are Vertical, Horizontal, or Touch Map.

Width
Size value. This property indicates the horizontal width in pixels of every button in the column. You can edit this field to apply specific dimension info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page, these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions.

188

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Programing Properties
All Programming properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the Programming tab of the Properties Window:

Address Code
Select or enter the address code sent to the master on the selected port.

Address Port
Select or enter the port to which the selected button's address code will be associated. The combination of Address Port and Address Code must be unique.

Channel Code
Select or enter the channel code sent to the master on the selected port. If the Channel Port is set to 0 = Setup Port, you can click on Channel Code to open the Basic Codes options, then click on Advanced Codes to access the advanced codes menu. Click the '+' sign beside Computer Control, to expand the Advanced Codes menu to show the available functions. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project.

Channel Port
Select or enter the port to which the selected button's channel code will be applied. The combination of Channel Port and Channel Code must be unique.

Command Output
Specify the command string sent to the master on button push.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the command output and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). Command Port
Select or enter the port to which the command string output will be applied.

Feedback
Select the type of feedback to associate with this button (channel, inverted channel, always on, momentary, blink, or none). none - the button will always display the Off state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) channel - the button will change states (Off to On) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event inverted channel - the button will change states (On to Off) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event always on - the button will always display the On state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) momentary - the button will change states, only while the button is being pressed. blink - the button will "blink" (switch between On and Off states) on a Push/Release

Level Aux
This (read-only) field indicates the auxiliary level sent to the Master on the selected port. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only, and only if a Level Code has been assigned.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

189

Working With Properties

Level Code
Select or enter the level code sent to the Master on the selected port (none, 1, 2 or auto-assign). Select Auto-Assign to automatically assign a level code to this button. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project.

Level Control Type

These options allow General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute, Relative or None). These options require additional Level Control parameters to be defined. Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount.

Level Control Value

For Absolute level control, this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. For Relative level control, this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. For relative level control, this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting).

Level Control Repeat Time

This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for Relative level control. For example, if this value is set to 1000, the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time.

Level Function
This option is only available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons. Select the desired level function: Display Only: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button that only displays level information (but cannot be used to control levels). Active: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button for controlling levels according the other button parameters set here. Active Centering: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. Drag: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that responds to a relative touch distance on the button after the initial touch, to allow for glide-point style controls. When set to Drag, the user can touch anywhere inside the joystick button and move the level (according to the Range Drag Increment setting). Drag Centering: This option creates an active drag bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released.

Level Port
Select or enter the port to which the Level Code will be applied. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button.

Range Aux Inverted

If set to Yes, only the Level Aux range is inverted (default = No). This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.

190

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Range Drag Increment

This field allows you to specify the amount of change that will be registered by one full drag across the control, to allow for fine/coarse adjustments. This property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only, and only if Drag is selected as the Level Function.

Range Low
Set the bottom of the level range (0-255).

Range High
Set the top of the level range (0-255).

Range Inverted
If set to Yes, the range is inverted, so that the top of the level range is 0 and the bottom of the range is 255 on both the X and Y axis (default = No). This button property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only.

Range Time Up
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

Range Time Down

Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

String Output
Specify the output string sent to the master on button push, on the specified String Output Port.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the output string and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). String Output Port
Select or enter the port to which the String Output will be applied.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

191

Working With Properties

State Properties
All State properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the States tab of the Properties Window:

Bitmap
To apply an image file as the background image to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image file from among those imported into the project. If pairs of image resources exist that end in *off/*on, *f/*n, *0/*1, *1/*2 (case insensitive), and the first in the pair is applied to the Off state of a General button, the second will be automatically applied to the On state to make it easier to set up images on a General button.

Bitmap Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Bitmap X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Bitmap Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Border Color
To change the border color for the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Border Name
To change the Border Name for the selected button, click Border Name, and select the desired border from the drop-down list. If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Chameleon Image
This field allows you to apply a Chameleon Image to the selected state(s). This property is only available only if the Border Name has been set to None. Chameleon Images can be used to create special effects such animated glow and drop-shadows. Click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image to apply as a Chameleon Image.

192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Draw Order
This field allows you to specify the order in which the elements of a button, page or popup page are drawn. By default, the draw order is: 1) fill, 2) bitmap,3) icon, 4) text, 5) border. Click the browse button (...) to access the State Draw Order dialog to change the draw order. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Fill Color
To change the fill color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For bargraph buttons, the preview image in the State Manager works differently than for the other button types. For bargraph buttons, the on and off states are used to indicate a level setting rather than a push/release. As a result, the button image in the Design View window will indicate the bargraph button as it will appear on the touch panel, but the thumbnails in the State Manager window indicate each state as a separate preview image. For example, the bargraph button shown below uses yellow as the On state fill color, and green as the Off state fill color. In the State Manager window you would see the On state (yellow) and the Off state (green) as individual thumbnails. The Button Preview window works differently for bargraph buttons than for the other button types. Rather than using the Push button to view the different states, click and drag on the slider with your mouse cursor (in the Button Preview window) to preview the feedback. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Font
To change the font used for text on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Font dialog, where you can select a Font, Style and Size for the button text. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the icon (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Slot
To apply an icon to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a slot assignment (icon) to apply.

Icon X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Icon Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

193

Working With Properties

Marquee Direction
This field allows you to specify the direction in which marquee text will move. By default, this property is set to Disabled. Click inside the field to activate the down arrow, to select from the other marquee direction options: The marquee direction options include: Disabled - When this property is set to Disabled, the text on the button will not be treated as marquee text. Scroll left - Text scrolls horizontally to the left. Scroll right - Text scrolls horizontally to the right. Ping-pong - Text "bounces" back and forth horizontally between the left and right boundaries of the button area. Scroll up - Text scrolls vertically upward. Scroll down - Text scrolls vertically downward. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Marquee Repeat
This field allows you to specify whether the marquee text element on a button will appear to repeat the text string once it has moved all the characters beyond the boundaries of the button. The movement of marquee text is specified by the Marquee Direction button state property. By default, this property is set to No. To enable repeat marquee text, click inside the field to activate the down arrow to change to Yes. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Overall Opacity
Use this field to specify the level of opacity for the selected button (0 - 255, where 0 is totally transparent, and 255 is totally opaque). The default is 255. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Scale Bitmap To Fit

This property is available only if the Bitmap selected for this button/state is a dynamic image. Note that this option is available only for Dynamo Dynamic Images (not for Dynamo Resource Images) This option scales the Dynamo Dynamic Image down to fit the container button, popup or page. It will not scale Dynamo Dynamic Images up to fit. To automatically scale the dynamic image (down only) to fit the button, click the down-arrow and select Scale To Fit (default = No). The options available for Scale Bitmap To Fit depend on the panel type associated with your project: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - This option doubles the size of the Dynamo Resource image. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Dynamic image, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.

194

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Sound
To change or apply a new sound file to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a sound file (WAV or MP3) from among those imported into the project.

Streaming Source
Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is available only if Streaming Video is selected as the Video Fill). Streaming Video is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video.

Text
To change or enter the text to be displayed on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the new button text. Use the Preview Using Font option to view the text as it will appear in the selected font, style and size (on by default). Unicode characters may be entered via the Enter Text dialog only (not through in-place editing in the States tab of the Properties Control window). When Unicode text is input, the name of the button will not match it's Off state text. Formatting codes can be used in the state text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Text Color
To change the text color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in a selected column.

Text Effect
Text effects are graphic effects that can applied to button/page/popup text (for example, the Glow effect applies a neon glow or halo effect to the text on the selected button/state(s). Each text effect is available in several variations ((i.e. Small, Medium, Large or XtraLarge). To apply a text effect to the button text, click the browse button (...) to access the Text Effect sub-menu. This sub-menu presents all available text effects, sorted by type. Click the + symbol next to any effect type in the sub-menu to see all of the variations on that effect. Once you have selected a text effect, use the Text Effect Color field to specify a color for the effect. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Effect Color

If you have selected to apply a text effect, use this field to specify the color of the selected effect. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the button text (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column

Text X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

195

Working With Properties

Text Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

Video Cropping
Use this field to specify the number of scan lines to be removed from both the top and bottom of the video signal. For best results, set the video button's aspect ratio to match the video input aspect ratio. This property is only available if the Video Fill State property is set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video.

Video Fill
Click the down arrow to select from a drop-down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project. Video-capable Modero panels support Composite video, and Enhanced Modero panels support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video formats. If you have specified the NXP-TPI4, click the down-arrow to select from the list of available video slots on the TPI4 (video slot 1,2,3 or 4) to use as the source for this video fill. If you select Streaming Video as the Video Fill, then the Streaming Source state property is made available. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is only available for video-capable panels. See the Video Capabilities for Modero Panels section on page 5 and the Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels section on page 5 for details.

Video Touch Pass-Thru

Select Yes from the drop-down menu to enable video pass-thru (disabled by default). This property is enabled only if the Video Fill State property has been set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video. Video pass-thru allows you to pass touch/control information from a touch input device (touch panel, mouse or keyboard) through a NXP-TPI/4 to a controlled device with video-out capabilities. This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS (mouse pass-thru) and KPS (keyboard passthru) commands.

Word Wrap
Use this option to enable the wrapping of text strings that are too long to be displayed across the page on one line. Click the down-arrow and select Yes or No from the drop-down list (default = No). Note that both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Using the All States Option

Use the All States option (in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to apply any changes you make to all states on the selected button. Note that if you have multiple buttons selected (Shift+click to select multiple buttons a page), the All States option only affects states for the button that has Edit Focus. The button with edit focus would be the last one selected, and is indicated by having red-colored square handles (as opposed to the black squares that indicate that a button is selected, but does not currently have edit focus).

196

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Searching For Button Properties

Select Edit > Find (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find dialog, which allows you to search for any button property value either within the currently open Page, or across the entire Project. You can specify to search for any General or State button property. For example, you can perform a search based on button type, name, border style, and state count (among many others), or any combination of search criteria. To search for button properties:

1. Open the Find dialog (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 Find dialog

2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next button to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is compressed to only show the
buttons that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Select All to close the Find dialog and select every button that meets the criteria. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

197

Working With Properties

When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

Searching and Replacing Button Properties

Select Edit > Find & Replace (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find and Replace dialog, which allows you to find (and optionally replace) any button property value with another value of your choosing. You can specify the scope of the search to either the currently open Page only, or across the entire Project (FIG. 189).

FIG. 189 Find and Replace dialog,

To search and replace button properties:

1. Open the Find & Replace dialog (see above). 2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. In the Replace Values table, select the button properties to use as the replace values. The Replace Values
do not necessarily have to match the Search Criteria (although they may). It is also possible to replace multiple values or establish multiple search criteria. For example, to change the Border Style on one or more buttons, select Border Style in the Search Criteria table, then select the particular border style to search for from the drop-down list. Then, select

198

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Border Style in the Replace Values table, and select the desired replacement border style from the dropdown list. Repeat this process for as many other button properties as needed.

5. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is displayed, listing the buttons
that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Replace All to close the Find dialog select every button that meets the criteria. The program informs you of the number of buttons affected by this change. All replace actions support full Undo / Redo capabilities. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

199

Working With Properties

200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Working With States

Overview
All G4 panel entities (Pages, popup pages and buttons) have at least one state. Pages and popup pages have only one state. General, Bargraph and Text Input buttons have only two states (on/off). Joystick buttons only use one state (Off). Multi-State General and Multi-State Bargraph buttons can have up to 256 states. States start at 1. The ability to set the State Properties (including border name, border color, fill color, text color, video fill, bitmap, bitmap justification, icon assignment, icon justification, font, text, text justification, word wrap preference and sound) is provided at the state level, via the States tab of the Properties Window.

State Manager Window

The State Manager window allows you to view and modify individual states. The State Manager window supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities (FIG. 190).

FIG. 190 State Manager window - showing a multi-state button (6 states)

The State Manager context window (open via right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager) support allows the user to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-State General buttons the different states are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up) and back again to Off (Range Time Down). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-State Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. You can set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number, provided it is not a level type button.

State Manager Context Menu

Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

201

Working With States

The items in this context menu include: Size - This option sets the size of the button thumbnail views as they appear in the State Manager window. Add States - This option opens the Add States dialog, which allows you to add multiple states to the selected button (up to a total of 255 states). Insert States - This option opens the Insert States dialog, which allows you to insert multiple states to the selected button. This option inserts the specified number of states directly after the selected (highlighted) state. Quick Input - Click to open the Quick Input sub-menu, where you can specify how to use the Quick Input feature (Current Property, Text or Disabled). Use Quick Input to make fast edits to various page and button elements and properties. Cut/Copy/Paste - Use these options to either cut, copy or paste a selected button state to/from clipboard memory. Replace - Use this option to replace the selected button state with the contents of clipboard memory. Delete - Use this option to delete the selected button state(s) from the button. Select All - This option selects all states associated with the selected button. Reverse States - This option reverses the order of states selected in the State Manager window. The selected states do no have to be contiguous. Set As Display State - This option sets the state that is currently being displayed in the Design View as the display state for the button. Image/Text Positioning - This option opens the Text/Image Position dialog, which allows you to specify the position of images and/or text on the selected button state(s). Animation Wizard - This option launches the Animation Wizard. The Animation Wizard guides you through the process of creating an animated button. Tweeners - Click to open the Tweeners sub-menu where you can select from several types of tweeners to use (for animation purposes).

Adding States To a Button

There are three ways in which new states can be added to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types): Duplicating an Existing State on the Button Adding States From the Clipboard Adding States Through Drag-and-Drop

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button

One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by duplicating an existing state on the button:

1. If the new states are to be added to the end of the collection (in the State Manager window), right-click to
open the State Manager Context Menu, and select Add States.

2. If the new states are to be inserted elsewhere in the collection, first select the state prior to which the new
states will be created, then right-click to open the State Manager Context Menu and select Insert States.

3. The Add States dialog (or the Insert States dialog if you selected Insert States) is displayed (FIG. 191).

FIG. 191 Add States dialog & Insert States dialogs

202

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Use these dialogs to specify the number of states to be created, and which existing state to duplicate (which will be highlighted in the State Manager as the state number is changed).

4. When the desired number of states and the state to duplicate have been chosen, press OK and the new
states will be added to the collection in the desired location. Otherwise, press Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any states.

Adding States From the Clipboard

One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by pasting states from the clipboard. Pasting states from the clipboard offers more power and flexibility than single state duplication. States may be copied from another button, page, or popup page, or even from a different panel:

1. First select the button, page, or popup page whose states will be copied. 2. In the State Manager window, select the source states. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add
states to the selection. Left-click + Shift to select a range of states.

3. When the source states have been selected, copy them to the clipboard (Ctrl-C). 4. With the source states copied to the clipboard, select the Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph button to
which the states in the clipboard should be copied (in the State Manager). Select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. To add the copied states to the end of the series, ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (or select the last state in the series).

5. Paste the states from the clipboard (Ctrl-V).

When copying states from another button or from a popup page, the pasted state's border style may be modified to ensure that it is an acceptable style in the button's border family.

Drag & Drop To Add States

A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to add copies of states within the same button is to use drag-anddrop:

1. First select the source state(s). Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add multiple states to the
selection. Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to select a range of states.

2. With the source states selected, press and hold the right mouse button while over one of the selected
states. While continuing to press the right mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be copied (FIG. 192).

FIG. 192 Drag & Drop To Add States

If the states are to be added to the end of the collection, drag the source states beyond the last state. If they are to be added elsewhere in the collection, drag the source states either over the state prior to which the new states will be inserted, or over the space between state thumbnails where the new states will be inserted.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

203

Working With States

3. Release the right mouse button and select Insert copy... from the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 193).

FIG. 193 Drag & Drop To Add States (Insert Copy...selected)

4. The new States are added according to the option selected in the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 194):

FIG. 194 Drag & Drop To Add States (States copied before State 3)

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button

You can set the maximum active state on a multi-state button by selecting the last state in a sequence (in the State Manager window) and selecting the States > Set As Max Active State option. The state tagged as the max active state will be the last one included in the multi-state sequence. All states beyond the max active state are ignored when the button is pushed. Note that the states that occur after the max active state in the sequence are displayed with crosshatching across the labels on the thumbnails in the State Manager window, to indicate which states will not be included in the multi-state sequence.

Removing States From A Button

States can be removed from a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types) by either deleting them from the collection, or by cutting them to the clipboard. Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph buttons must have at least two states. Actions that would cause the number of states to drop below two are not allowed.

Deleting States 1. Select the states to be deleted. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection.
Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Delete the selected states by selecting the Edit > Delete, State Manager Context Menu > Delete, or the
Del key.

204

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Cutting States To the Clipboard 1. Select the states to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection. Hold
down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard by selecting Edit > Cut, State Manager Context Menu > Cut, or
the Ctrl-X keyboard accelerator.

Changing the Order Of States On A Button

Changing the order of states in a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button can be accomplished either through the clipboard or by drag-and-drop:

Reordering States Through the Clipboard 1. In the State Manager window, select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard (Ctrl-X). 3. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection: a. Ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (click anywhere outside of a state
thumbnail, or press ESC).

b. Then, paste the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste, State Manager Context Menu >
Paste, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

4. If the states are to be moved elsewhere in the collection: a. Left-click to select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. b. Then insert the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Insert, State Manager Context Menu >
Insert, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop

A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to reorder states is to use drag-and-drop.

1. Select the states to be moved.

Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while over one of the selected states. While continuing to press the
left mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be moved. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection, drag the states beyond the last state. If they are to be moved elsewhere in the collection, drag the states over the space between state thumbnails where they will be moved.

3. Release the left mouse button (the same operation can also be performed with a right mouse button dragand-drop, selecting "Move" from the drag-and-drop menu).

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button

Copying a State to the Clipboard
Copying a state from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired states in the State Manager then either clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu or clicking on the Copy button from the main toolbar. You may also right click and select copy from the context menu.

Pasting a State from the Clipboard

You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or by clicking the Paste toolbar button) a previously copied state onto a corresponding state in the State Manager (for the page or popup page).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

205

Working With States

Pasting a state on the panel name in the Panel Navigator (which is for pages or popup pages only), on the folder named Pages (which is for pages only), on the folder named Popup Pages (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Draw Order (Z-Order)

Z-Order, or "Draw Order" refers to the order in which the various visual elements of a Page, Popup Page or Button are drawn on the screen. The element at the top of the Z-Order overlaps all other elements. The top of the Z-Order is like the top layer in a multi-layer drawing. The element at the bottom of the Z-Order is overlapped by all other elements. The bottom of the ZOrder is like the bottom layer in a multi-layer drawing. By default, the state draw order is:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

fill bitmap icon text border

You can change the draw order via the options in the State Draw Order dialog.

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States

Use the State Draw Order dialog to specify the draw order for selected states:

1. Select a button, page or popup page. 2. Click the Browse button (...) in the Draw Order State property to access the State Draw Order dialog
(FIG. 195).

FIG. 195 State Draw Order dialog

3. Select an element in the list, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the element up or
down in the list.

4. Repeat with the other elements in the list to rearrange the order as desired. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note that the new draw order is indicated in the Draw Order state property.

206

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Working With Function Codes

Overview
In terms of designing buttons that interact with and control the various devices on the control system, TPD4 uses a concept that is familiar to TPDesign3 users, but which has a new name in TPD4: Function Codes. Function Codes were known as Channel Codes and Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. In TPD4, the term Function Codes refers to all three of the code types that can be assigned to buttons: Channel Codes: Displayed in the upper-left corner of the button, the channel codes indicate the port number and the channel code associated with the button. The channel codes represent communication out of the panel to the master controller. Address Codes: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the button, address codes in TPD4 are similar to the Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. The address code represents communication from the master controller to the panel, causing the panel to do something (i.e. indicate feedback, display a text string, etc). Level Codes: Displayed in the lower-left corner of the button, level codes represent bi-directional communication between the panel and the master controller (i.e. the panel can cause a change in a level setting, and a changed level setting generates feedback on the panel). Each function code is a two-part number separated by a colon: Port Number:Channel/Address/Level Number (depending on which function code you are looking at). In the example below, the button function code assignments all indicate port 1 and channel/level/address 1 (FIG. 196).

FIG. 196 Button Function Code Assignments

The easiest way to handle function codes is to create and finalize your touch panel pages and buttons (with function codes) before generating the supporting Axcess or NetLinx program code. That way, in case you have to change any aspect of the project (i.e. add/remove controlled equipment, test strings, graphics, etc), you can update the function code assignments in TPD4, rather than having to re-write your code. There are several key differences in the way Function Codes work in TPD4 relative to the way they worked in TPDesign3: "Devices" in TPDesign3 are known as "Ports" in TPD4 (the maximum number of available ports in TPD4 is 100). Where there was a maximum number of 255 channel codes per device in TPDesign3, you can assign up to 4000 codes per port in TPD4. Unlike TPDesign3, TPD4 lets you to assign Address and Channel Codes directly to a page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

207

Working With Function Codes

Show/Hide Function Codes

You can choose to display function codes, as well as the current state of buttons in the Design View window via the View > Display Function Codes option (or the toolbar button).

If Display Function Codes is enabled, they will also be included in printed output.

Alternatively, press the F7 key to toggle the function codes.

Function Codes - Limitations

The maximum number of channel codes per port is 4000. The maximum number of address codes per port is 4000. The maximum number of level codes per port is 600. The maximum number of ports in TPD4 is 100.

Function Code Map

Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the Function Code Map (FIG. 197).

FIG. 197 Function Code Map

208

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes, Address codes, Level codes, String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file, displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Navigator window. This list is sorted by Port, and within Port by Code. If codes have been assigned to any of the panel's sensors (light, motion, battery, and/or cradle), they will now appear in the Function Map and can be modified there just like button function codes. You can use the Function Code Map to delete codes as well as drag and drop items from one port to another, within the primary folder the selected item belongs to (i.e. Channel Codes, Address Codes, Level Codes). For example, you cannot drag and drop an Address Code (regardless of the port folder that contains it) into any port folder contained in either the Channel or Level folders.

Neither String or Command Outputs support any type of drag and drop operations.

Selecting an item in the tree and then left clicking again will provide an in-place edit of the code value. While you can (in-place) edit the Channel, Address and Level codes via these folders, you cannot edit String or Command Outputs the same way. These can only be edited via the Programming tab of the Properties Control window. A double-click action on the item will open the associated page (or popup page) and place the edit focus on that item. Setting the Address, Channel or Level port to the setup port provides a list of predefined actions. Select Panel > Verify Function Codes to automatically verify the active project's Function Code Map, and fix any problems that are found.

0- Setup Port
Setting the Address, Channel or Level port to the setup port ("0") provides a list of predefined actions. Some of the actions may be hardware dependent. Therefore, ensure that the codes selected apply to your particular panel type. In the event that an inappropriate code is selected for a given panel type, that code will be ignored.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

209

Working With Function Codes

Using Power Assign

One of the big time-eating factors of creating a touch panel file is correctly setting up the channel, address and level function codes for any given button, and other properties that depend on button type. Use Power Assign to streamline this process. The Power Assign feature can operate on a single button, or on a group of selected buttons. Select Button > Power Assign (or press F8) to open the Power Assign dialog (FIG. 198).

FIG. 198 Power Assign dialog

One valuable use of this feature is to establish a contiguous range of channel / address codes on a set of buttons. To accomplish this, left-click on the button in the set that should receive the first channel / address code, then by holding down the CTRL key, select each of the remaining buttons in the set in the order in which you want the channel / address codes to be assigned. Finally, by following the instructions below and utilizing the Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment options, one can assign channel / address codes to every button in the set with significantly fewer mouse clicks and keystrokes than would otherwise be possible. Power Assign works only at the button level, and does not affect pages or popup pages.

Clear Channels First

One powerful feature of Power Assign is the ability to clear the various function codes from the buttons. Once you ensure that the desired button or buttons have been selected, all you need to do is bring up the Power Assign dialog, then:

1. Under Function Code Action, select Clear. 2. Under Function Code Type, select Channel, Address or Level. 3. Click Assign.
It is good practice to clear the function codes before any Assign Codes operations. If you don't clear the codes first, and any of the buttons in the group you are assigning already have codes assigned, they will show up as used when Power Assign does its' checks. In some cases, this may be what you want to have happen, but usually you'll want to clear them before assigning.

Assign Codes
Next assign new function codes:

1. Under Function Code Action, select Assign. 2. Under Function Code Type, select Channel, Address or Level. 3. Click Assign.
To use take full advantage of Power Assign, you need to understand the nuances of some of the options involved:

210

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Begin Assignment At (Power Assign)

When Begin Assignment At is selected (in the Power Assign dialog) you can specify the starting value of the Port and Function (Channel, Address, or Level) code. If you don't check the Begin Assignment At option, the assign operation begins at the first available channel, just like the standard Auto Assign. The Begin Assignment At function is particularly useful for setting up things like numeric keypads, where you need the channel codes to begin at a specific value, since you might be using offset math in your code to process the button pushes.

Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign)

This is used when the channel codes have to be in order, with no breaks between them, as in a numeric keypad. In these cases, since the order is important, use CTRL-select to select the buttons in the order you want to assign the channels. If you don't care what channels are assigned, uncheck this option, and TPD4 will find the next available free channels, skipping used channels and continuing on until all available channels have been assigned. In this case the values will be subject to whether or not you've set the Begin Assignment At checkbox.

Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign)

Since touch panels support more than one port, you're not limited to 256 channel and address codes. However, things like SYSTEM_CALLS are based upon all the channels coming from a single device (port). If the channels are split across ports, the feedback part of the System Call won't work. Another thing that comes into play with being able to use multiple ports is that you may need to confine certain ranges of channel codes to a single port to take advantage of the DEFINE_MUTUALLY_EXCLUSIVE channel grouping in the code. Since MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE works on a particular port, one must ensure that the group of buttons is entirely within a single port. In either of these cases, check the Wrap Within Port ID option, which ensures that all channel codes assigned fall within a single port. One nice thing about the Power Assign palette is that it retains its settings after use, which is handy when you need both the channel and address codes to have the same numeric values. First, use the Functions tab of the Workspace Navigator and click back and forth between the channel and address options. Look for a clear range of channel and address codes large enough, and make a note of the start channel. Next, open the Power Assign dialog. Here's the setup you would use:

1. Check Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment. 2. Then supply the port and channel code values, click Channel under Function Code Type, and click
Assign.

3. Next, click Address under Function Code Type, and click Assign again.
You can visually verify that the desired action was accomplished by ensuring that the Display Function & State Overlay option is selected from the View menu. This will visually display the channel, address, and level codes (in addition to the currently displayed state) in the corners of the buttons. While initially somewhat confusing, an immense amount of power is available in the options within the floating Power Assign dialog. Since the selection is retained after any operation, if you make a mistake, it's easy to click Clear Codes and hit the assign button again. One can also simply undo the action if desired. Remember that Power Assign processes the function code assignments based on the order in the selection so, if the order is important to you, make sure to create the selection using CTRL-Select.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

211

Working With Function Codes

212

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Colors and Palettes

Working With Colors and Palettes

Working With Colors
A key feature of TPD4 is it's ability to utilize the full 32-bit RGB color palette, which allows you to specify RGB (Red, Blue and Green) values, plus Hue, Saturation, Brightness and Opacity. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors that can be applied to fills (pages, popup pages, and buttons), transparencies (popup pages and buttons), and text (pages, popup pages and buttons). TPD4 also allows you to save or load custom palettes. Every color element that is not assigned either directly via an RGBA selection or the named color table will reference this palette and be affected by any changes made to it. Palettes are saved as part of the panel file. Additionally, TPD4 supports the importing of either a JASC formatted palette file, a Microsoft formatted palette file, or a custom palette file previously saved from within the application. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index, you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. In most cases, any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle, since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Color assignments are made through the Colors dialog. There are several ways to open the Colors dialog: When setting new button parameters, click on the Border Color, Fill Color or Text Color toolbar icons to open the base palette, then click More Colors. Click to select an existing page, popup page or button, and click on Fill Color in the States tab of the Properties Control Window. The Colors dialog supports three ways to select colors from the RGB color palette:

1. RGB Color: a full-feature RGB palette that allows you specify RGB (plus Hue, Saturation, Brightness
and Opacity) values numerically, or by dragging the cursor around the palette. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors (FIG. 199).

FIG. 199 Colors dialog - RGB Color

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

213

Working With Colors and Palettes

2. Palette Index: a default palette that provides the Base 88 colors (which the can be modified if desired).
The Palette Index offers a maximum of 255 colors (FIG. 200).

FIG. 200 Colors dialog - Palette Index

3. Color Name: a named color selection dialog based on the Base 88 color scheme. These Base 88 colors
are identical to those provided in previous versions of TPDesign3, and include the transparent color in position 255 (FIG. 201).

FIG. 201 Colors dialog - Color Name

214

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Colors and Palettes

Neither JASC nor Microsoft palette files support transparency in the same manner that TPD4 utilizes transparency, so once imported, custom palettes cannot be reopened in another graphics package.

Working With Palettes

TPD4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create and save custom palettes. Custom Palettes can be saved as *.PAL files, which can then be imported/exported for use in other TPD4 projects. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette, the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project, this can cause color shifting on the button. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder), without having to edit the buttons directly. For example, you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design - one color scheme for each season.

Working With Multiple Color Palettes

TPDesign4 supports multiple color palettes to allow easy switching between color schemes, and named palette entries. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create custom palettes and save them as *.PAL files that can then be imported/exported for use in other projects.

Creating New Palette Entries 1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202).

FIG. 202 Edit Palettes dialog

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

215

Working With Colors and Palettes

By default, the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of this dialog). Each color that is listed in the palette is considered to be a palette entry, and each palette entry is represented by an index number (1-256). The index numbers correlate to the slot in the palette that this color occupies.

2. Select the palette that you want to add a new palette entry (color) to, in the palette selection drop-down
list.

3. Select a palette entry:

To add a new palette entry to the palette, select a slot with no color assignment. To edit an existing palette entry, select an existing color.

4. Use the cursor in the Color Value chart, in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright, Red/Blue/Green, opacity
(and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette.

5. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. This is optional, but highly
recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details.

6. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color and color name (if applicable) to the selected slot in
the palette.

Creating Custom Palettes 1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on
page 215). By default, the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list.

2. Click the New button to clear the palette index of all entries. By default, the new palette is titled
Unnamed, as indicated in the palette selection drop-down list in the upper-left corner of this dialog.

3. To add palette entries (colors) to this palette, use the cursor in the Color Value chart, in conjunction with
the Hue/Sat/Bright, Red/Blue/Green, opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette.

4. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. This is optional, but highly
recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details.

5. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color (and color name if applicable) to the selected slot in
the palette.

6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 to add as many additional colors to this palette as needed. Renaming Palettes 1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on
page 215). By default, the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list.

2. Select the palette that you want to rename from the palette selection drop-down list, in the upper-left
corner of this dialog.

3. Click the Rename button to open the Rename dialog (FIG. 203 on page 216).

FIG. 203 Rename dialog

4. Enter the new name for this palette in the text field and select OK.

216

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Colors and Palettes

5. The new name of the palette is indicated in the palette selection drop-down list. Note that the new name
overwrites the previous name (removing the previous name from the list).

Changing the Active Palette

To select a different palette to use, select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to access the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on page 215), and select from the listing of available palettes in the palette selection drop-down list, in the upper-left corner of the dialog.

Importing Palette Files

You can import palette (*.PAL) files for use in your project via the Import option in the Edit Palettes dialog:

1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on page 215). 2. Click the Import button to access the Open dialog. Use this dialog to locate and select the desired *.PAL
file.

3. Click Open to import the selected palette file and close the Open dialog. 4. If you desire to make the imported palette the active palette, you must select the Set Active button at the
top of the dialog.

Exporting Palette Files

You can export palette (*.PAL) files for use in other projects via the Export option in the Edit Palettes dialog. Use this feature to save and distribute custom palettes that can be imported back into TPD4 via the Import option:

1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on page 215). 2. Click the Export button to access the Save As dialog. Use this dialog to save the palette to a specified
directory, as a *.PAL file.

Copying Palettes
Use the Copy and Paste buttons at the top of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste entire palettes:

1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on
page 215).

2. Select the palette that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner
of the dialog).

3. Click the Copy button. 4. Click the Paste button to paste the contents of the source palette into the new (target) palette.
Alternatively, you could open an existing palette and paste over the existing palette entries.

Copying Palette Entries

Use the Copy Entry and Paste Entry buttons at the bottom of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste individual palette entries (colors):

1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 202 on
page 215).

2. Select the palette that contains the color(s) that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list
(in the upper-left corner of the dialog).

3. 4. 5. 6.

Click to select the palette entry that you want to copy. Click the Copy Entry button. Click the New button to open a new (empty palette) or select an existing one from the drop-down list. Select the slot that you want to paste the copied palette entry into and click Paste Entry.

If you select a slot that already has a palette entry, the copied color will overwrite the original.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

217

Working With Colors and Palettes

Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder

TPDesign4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder), without having to edit the buttons directly. For example, you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design - one color scheme for each design. Using custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPDesign4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Custom palettes are created in TPDesign4, and saved as part of the TPD4 project. TPDesign4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.TPT). However, the Color Schemes feature is applied via the Project menu in G4 PanelBuilder. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. In order to utilize Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder, the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. These preview images are used to display the color schemes that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements, the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. While it is not an enforced requirement, in order for the project to actually make use of multiple palettes in G4 PanelBuilder, the buttons in the project must use the border types that come with TPD4 (as opposed to a custom image that defines the button's look). When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template, and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application, the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. You can also use Chameleon Images in conjunction with custom palettes to further enhance the use of Color schemes in G4 PanelBuilder.

Using the Microsoft Paint Utility Program

Select Tools > Paint to launch the Microsoft Paint Utility program. Refer to the Paint online help for instructions on using Microsoft Paint.

218

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Video Fills

Working With Video Fills

Overview
If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel, you can assign a "video fill" to a page, popup page or button. The NXP-TPI/4, TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodate up to 4 video source inputs, and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill.

Streaming Video Fills

If the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video (NXD/NXT-1200VG, NXD/NXT-1500VG, and NXD/NXT-1700VG only), Streaming Source is available as a video fill option. TPD4 supports video fills directly to the page/popup page, without having to create a page-size button (as was the case in TPDesign3). The NXP-TPI/4 and TPI-PRO accommodate up to four video source inputs, and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. If Streaming Source is selected from the drop-down list of Video Fill options (in the States tab of the Properties Window), then Streaming Source is added to the list of state properties. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream in the Streaming Source field.

Displaying a Video Source on a Page

TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page, Popup Page or Button. To apply a video fill to a Page:

1. Select (or a create) a Page in your project. 2. In the Properties Control window - States Tab, click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available
video sources. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. 204).

FIG. 204 State Properties: Video Fill options

If you are working with an existing page with buttons, be sure to click on the page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Page, and not a button on the page.

3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

219

Working With Video Fills

Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page

TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page, Popup Page or Button. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page:

1. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. 2. In the Properties Control window - States Tab, click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available
video sources (Source 1-4). If you are working with an existing Popup Page with buttons, be sure to click on the popup page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Popup Page, and not a button on the Popup Page.

3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Popup Page. Displaying a Video Source on a Button
TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page, Popup Page or Button. To apply a video fill to a Button:

1. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. 2. In the Properties Control window - States Tab, click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available
video sources (Source 1-4). Since this is a state-oriented setting, be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. To apply the video fill across all states, use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). Alternatively, you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window.

3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button.

220

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Video Fills

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

221

Working With Video Fills

222

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Animation Effects

Working With Animation Effects

Overview
TPD4 utilizes three main concepts for supporting animation effects in your projects: Animation Wizard Tweening Chameleon Images

Using the Animation Wizard

The Animation Wizard is a powerful tool included with TPD4. It guides you through the steps of generating an animation sequence that can be applied to a multi-state button to apply impressive visual effects to your buttons. Multi-state buttons can have up to 256 states, all of which are available to be used as "frames" in an animation. You can create an animation sequence for a multi-state button manually, by creating a series of states and applying a different bitmap or icon to each state and treating each state as an individual frame. This however, would be a very tedious and time-intensive process. The Animation Wizard automates most of the process and makes the task easy. Note: If you select a General (two-state) button to use with the animation wizard, the wizard will allow you to add the necessary number of states to the button to accommodate the animation sequence (and automatically change the button type to Multi-State General). To create a simple button animation using the Animation Wizard:

1. Select Button > Animation Wizard to start the wizard. This opens the first of six dialogs: Animation
Wizard - Select Type (Step 1 of 6).

Animation Wizard - Select Type (Step 1 of 6)

Use the radio buttons in this dialog to specify the type of animation to create (Bitmap or Icon). Select Bitmap to use bitmaps in the animation. Select Icon to use icons in the animation. Select Chameleon Image to use (32-bit PNG) chameleon images in the animation.

2. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard - Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. Use this dialog to
specify the images to be included in the animation, and set the sequence of the images.

Animation Wizard - Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6)

Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation, and set the sequence of the images. The Sequence selection is set to "[custom]" by default, and there are no other options in this dropdown list until at least one sequence has been created. Once you import a series of images with identical names except for a post-fixed numeric indicator, they will be available via this drop-down list. To add the images that will comprise the animation sequence, click the Add button. This opens the Select Resource dialog, where you can select which images to include in the animation. Ctrl+click to select multiple files, or Shift+click to select the range of files between two selections. Note that the only images that are available to choose from are those that have been imported into the project, through the File > Import Resources option, or via the Import button on the Resource Manager dialog (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54 for details). In order for images to appear in the Sequence drop down for selection, the images that you use to create the animation must be named in sequence (i.e. cool_button_spin01.jpg, cool_button_spin02.jpg, cool_button_spin03.jpg, cool_button_spin04.jpg, etc...). Also, make sure the numbering convention used for the files is consistent (i.e. don't mix "1" and "01" or "001"). Although you can edit the sequence of the images in the animation manually, it makes things easier if you take naming into consideration before importing the files.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

223

Working With Animation Effects

You can bring existing animated GIF files into your project via a third-party application (for example JASC 's Animation Shop which comes bundles with Paint Shop Pro - version 7 or higher; there are also many freeware applications available). The general concept is that you start with an existing animated GIF image, and save each frame in the animation out as an individual image file (resulting in a series of image files). Once extracted, these files can be imported into your TPD4 project, and the original GIF animation can be simulated. Note that since TPD4 does not support the (proprietary) .GIF file type, you will have to save the frames out to a supported file type. Click OK in the Select Resource dialog to return to the Animation Wizard - Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. The image files you selected now appear in alpha-numeric order in the preview window of this dialog. If the images were named consecutively, you shouldn't have to modify the sequence at all. Use the Move Left and Move Right buttons to re-arrange the image sequence (if necessary). Use the Add and Remove buttons to add/remove selected images from the sequence (if necessary).

3. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard - Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) dialog. Animation Wizard - Size & Position (Step 3 of 6)
Use this dialog to specify the size and position of the animation relative to the button that will contain it. This dialog tells you two important pieces of information: the size of the animated image, and the size of the button that will contain it. Use the radio buttons in the top-half of the dialog to specify wether to scale the button to fit the animated image, or to simply apply the animation to the button at its current size. If you are applying an animation that is bigger than the containing button, a warning message is displayed along the bottom of the dialog, and the animated image will be clipped (cropped) to fit in the button. Use the options in the lower-half of this dialog to specify the positioning of the animated image relative to the button containing it. Select the desired position option from the drop-down list. If you select Absolute, use the X and Y fields to indicate the desired position. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels), meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0, 0.

4. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard - Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) dialog. Animation Wizard - Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6)
Use this dialog to create enough states to accommodate the number of frames in the animation sequence. For example, if you create a multi-state button, and open the Animation Wizard before adding any states, you have only two states on the button. Obviously, the animation sequence will have more than two frames. Lets say that your sequence has ten frames. The options in this dialog allow you to automatically detect the number of frames in the animation sequence, and the number of states available on the button to which the animation is to be applied. So, for a ten-frame animation, you'll have to add at least eight states to the button (one frame per button state). Use the first field to indicate which state to start the animation on (default = 1, the first state). Use the next field to indicate which of the existing states to duplicate, if more states are required for the animation. If button states exist beyond the end of the animation, use the radio buttons to indicate how to handle them (Leave Alone or Remove).

5. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard - Appearance (Step 5 of 6) dialog.

224

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Animation Effects

Animation Wizard - Appearance (Step 5 of 6)

Use this dialog to specify how treat the Button Border Style, and Button Fill Color on the resulting button. If creating a bitmap animation, these options default to no border (Set to "none") and transparent fill (Set to "transparent"). If creating a icon animation, these options default to leave both border an fill color alone (Leave alone).

6. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard - Finish (Step 6 of 6) dialog. Animation Wizard - Finish (Step 6 of 6)
This dialog lists the actions to be taken to generate the button animation, including: The number of states to be added to the button, and which state to duplicate. The position of the animation on the button. The starting state for the animation, the number of frames in the animation, and the animation type (Bitmap or Icon). A listing of each state and the image file associated with it. Click Finish to generate the animation. Note that the animation is indicated in the State Manager window. Use the Button Preview window to view the animation (select View > Button Preview, and click Push). Remember, many other animation effects can be achieved via the Tweening tools of TPD4.

Tweening
Short for in-betweening, "tweening" is the process of altering the display properties of intermediate frames between two images to give the appearance that the first image evolves smoothly into the second image. Tweening is a common concept in all sorts of animation software. TPD4 supports multi-state buttons, which can have up to 256 states which are used to animate a button push from Off to On and back again to Off. In TPD4, each state of a multi-state button can be thought of as an individual frame. So, if you create a multi-state button with 256 states, you might say that you have 256 frames available for the animation. When the multi-state button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. This is called "Animate Time Up", and is definable in 1/10th second increments. When the button is turned back Off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. This is called "Animate Time Down", also definable in 1/10th second increments. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. Provided you are not creating an image-based animation, the tweening process greatly simplifies the process of generating each state individually by automatically creating a gradual transition across all states based on the state properties of the first and last states. Beyond simplifying the process of creating motion animations, tweening also generates very smooth color transition effects that would be difficult or impossible to do any other way. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting), it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. Since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4, to make a button fade completely in/out on a page, you would have to create the button without borders.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

225

Working With Animation Effects

Creating Color Transition Effects

Use the Border Color, Fill Color and Text Color tweeners to easily apply color transition effects to multi-state buttons. The color tweeners can be used individually, or in combinations to create smooth fades from one color to another when the button is pressed. With 256 states available to use as "frames" in a tweened animation, these effects can be made to be very subtle and smooth. However, most color transition effects don't require that many frames to produce a very smooth fade. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting), it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. Note that to make buttons fade in/out completely, you would have to create the button without a border assignment, since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. When the button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. This is called "Animate Time Up", and is definable in 1/10th second increments. When the button is turned back Off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. This is called "Animate Time Down", also definable in 1/10th second increments. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. To create a color transition effect: The following steps apply to all three button color attributes (Border Color, Fill Color, Text Color and Text Effect Color):

1. Select (or create a new) multi-state button with at least three states (FIG. 205). Note that the more states
you use, the smoother the transitions will appear.

FIG. 205 Multi-State Button (4 States)

2. Apply a color (Fill Color, Border Color, Text Color, Text Effect Color or any combination) to the last state
that is different from that of the first state (FIG. 206).

FIG. 206 Multi-State Button (4 States)

To create a fade effect, leave the colors the same for the first and last states, but change the opacity on one of them to zero (via the Colors dialog, set to RGB colors). An opacity setting of zero makes the button totally transparent. An opacity setting of 255 (max) makes the button totally opaque.

3. Ctrl+click to select two states in the State Manager window that are separated by at least one state (do not
select the intermediate states). The color tweener(s) will generate a transition effect that fades the first color into the second (FIG. 207).

226

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Animation Effects

FIG. 207 Multi-State Button (4 States)

The most basic type of color transition effect starts at the first state (or frame) and ends at the last. However, the TPD4 tweening tools are not limited to one tween effect per multi-stage button press. Experiment with applying multiple color tweens to the same button, and with different combinations of tweeners.

4. Right-click on one of the highlighted states in the State Manager window, and select Tweeners from the
context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu.

5. Select one or more of the color tweeners to apply effects. The results are displayed immediately in the
State Manager window (FIG. 208).

FIG. 208 Multi-State Button (4 States)

Use the All Colors Tweener to tween all colors applied to the button.

Creating Animated Bitmap Effects

Use the Icon Position and Bitmap Position tweeners to apply animated bitmap effects to multi-state buttons. The Icon Position tweener allows you to cause an icon to move around the button area when it is pressed. The Bitmap Position tweener allows you to cause a bitmap to move around the button area when it is pressed. Animated bitmap effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eyecatching visual effects. To create animated bitmap effects with an icon:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select (or create a new) multi-state button. Add an icon to the button (via the Icon field in the Properties Control window - States tab). Set the Icon Justification property to Absolute. Move the icon into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu).

5. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). 6. Duplicate the state that the tweening should begin across all states to be included in the tween. 7. In the last state included in the tween, place the icon in its end position in the animation via the Image/
Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu).

8. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the icon start and end positions in the State Manager
window. They must be separated by at least one stage, and you should not select the intermediate states).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

227

Working With Animation Effects

To create animated bitmap effects with a bitmap image, follow the steps outlined above. The only difference is that you will select and apply a bitmap rather than an icon to the button. In order to apply motion tweening to an icon, bitmap or text, the justification for the icon, bitmap or text must be set to Absolute.

Creating Animated Text Effects

Use the Text Position tweener to apply animated text effects to multi-state buttons. The text position tweener allows you to have the button text move around the button area when it is pressed. Animated text effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eye-catching visual effects. To create animated text effects:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select (or create a new) multi-state button. Add text to the button (via the Text field in the Properties Control window - States tab). Set the Text Justification property to Absolute. Move the text into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu).

5. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). 6. Copy the text from the first state to the last state to be tweened, and move it to its end position in the
animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu).

7. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the text start and end positions in the State Manager
window. They must be separated by at least one stage, and you should not select the intermediate states). The Text Position tweener will generate a motion effect that moves the text across the button. In order to apply tweening to an icon, bitmap or text, the justification for the icon, bitmap or text must be set to Absolute.

Tweeners sub-menu
Select Tweeners from the States Menu or the State Manager context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. This menu allows you to select a type of tweener to use in creating animations on multi-state buttons. Note that depending on the elements of the selected buttons, some of these options may not be available. For example, the Bitmap Position option is only available if the selected buttons use a bitmap. The options in this menu include: Border Color - This option tweens the Border color (only) between two selected button states. Fill Color - This option tweens the Fill color (only) between two selected button states. Text Color - This option tweens the Text color (only) between two selected button states. Text Effect Color - This option tweens the Text Effect Color (only) between two selected button states. All Colors - This option tweens the Border, Fill, Text, and Text Effect colors between two selected states all at once. Overall Opacity - This option tweens the Overall Opacity (only) between two selected button states. Bitmap Position - This option tweens the position of a bitmap applied to two selected button states. Icon Position - This option tweens the position of an icon applied to two selected button states. Text Position - This option tweens the position of text applied to two selected button states. All Positions - This option will tween the Bitmap, Icon, and Text positions applied to two selected button states all at once.

228

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Animation Effects

Text Size - This option tweens the size of text applied to two selected button states. The position-oriented tweener options only work when the selected elements are set to use absolute positioning.

Chameleon Images
TPD4 supports a button state property called Chameleon Image. A chameleon image is a PNG image file that, when applied to a button/state, uses the Fill and Border colors assigned to the button/state to determine the colors in the image. In other words, it is an image that can have its colors changed on the panel itself (at runtime). PNG images consist of four separate color channels (Alpha, Red, Green and Blue), and chameleon images use the button/state's Fill and Border color assignments to determine the colors used in the image as follows: The Alpha channel of the Chameleon image defines the overall shape mask for the state. The Red channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Fill Color. The Green channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Border Color. The Blue channel is not used. As a result, if the Fill and/or Border colors are changed, then the colors used in the chameleon image will change accordingly. One possible benefit of using chameleon images is that, when used in conjunction with custom palettes, they enable the ability to create multiple color schemes that can be applied to a single template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Refer to the Chameleon Images, Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder help topic for details. When creating an image to be used as a Chameleon image in TPD4, set the image properties to RGB Color and 8 Bits/Channel. For an example of a chameleon image, refer to the "Chameleon Demo" TPD4 file attached to Tech Note TN733 to provide an example of chameleon images. This file can be viewed in G4 PanelPreview or on an actual G4 panel. To access AMX Tech Notes, you must be logged into www.amx.com as a dealer.

Requirements for Chameleon Images

Chameleon images can be applied to buttons to create animated highlighting, glow and drop-shadow effects. When used with multi-state buttons, chameleon images can also take advantage of TPD4's tweening tools to easily create color transition effects. Furthermore, chameleon images may also use a companion bitmap which, when placed on top (via the Draw Order state property), can add highlighting and shadow effects to convincingly create an illusion of depth. The basic requirements that allow an image file to be recognized as a chameleon image in TPD4 are: It is a PNG image file It uses RGB color (8 bits/channel) It has an alpha channel defined In order for a chameleon image to be applied to buttons or popup pages, the Border Name state property must be set to none. When the border name is set to none, then the Chameleon Image property becomes available. The Chameleon Image state property is available for all button types except Text Input, Computer Control and TakeNote buttons. Note that chameleon images are not necessarily different from any other PNG image file. Ideally, the image to be used is one that either was created or was selected specifically with the concept of colorizable regions that could be changed to suit different design needs. That is, while virtually any PNG file could be applied as a chameleon image, some images make more sense and would give better results than others.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

229

Working With Animation Effects

The characteristics that define any image as a chameleon image are:

1. It meets the technical requirements for a chameleon image. 2. It has been applied to a button as the Chameleon Image (via the Chameleon Image state property). Working With Chameleon Images
Chameleon Images utilize the 4 color channels (Red, Blue, Green and Alpha) that comprise 32-bit images to define separate colorizable regions (FIG. 209).

FIG. 209 Working With Chameleon Images

Working With Chameleon Images - Example

Here's an example of creating a simple chameleon image, for the purpose of illustrating the basic concepts used:

1. Using an image editing program to create an image to use as the chameleon image:
Only PNG image files can be used as chameleon images, since in TPD4, only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4, the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors (32-bit). Use the alpha channel to define the overall desired shape of the button (see Working with Transparent Backgrounds for more information). When creating an image to be used as a chameleon image, keep in mind that the Red and Green color channels will be replaced by the colors specified as the Fill and Border colors in TPD4 for each state of the button. The Blue color channel is not used for chameleon buttons.

2. Export the image as a PNG file. The exported file must be a 32-bit RGB Color (8 Bits/Channel) file in
order to be interpreted correctly by TPD4 as a chameleon image.

3. Import the image file into TPD4 (via the Import button on the Images tab of the Resource Manager
dialog).

4. In a Design View window, create or select a button to which you wish to apply the chameleon image.
Keep in mind that the Chameleon Image state property is not available for Text Input, Computer Control or TakeNote button types.

230

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Animation Effects

5. In the States tab of the Properties Window, set the button's Border Name to None. Note that at this point,
the Chameleon Image property becomes available (directly beneath Border Name).

6. In the Chameleon Image property, click the browse button (...) to access the Resource Manager dialog.
Select the chameleon image (in the Image tab) and click OK to apply it to the selected button. Now that the image has been applied as a chameleon image, note that any portion of the image that exists on the Red color channel now matches the color specified in the Fill Color state property. Similarly, any portion of the image that exists on the Green color channel now matches the color specified in the Border Color state property. A few examples of color changes resulting from changing the Fill and Border colors for the button/state with the chameleon image (FIG. 210):

FIG. 210 Chameleon Image - Fill and Border colors

Since chameleon buttons rely on the Border and Fill color settings, you can use the Fill Color and Border Color Tweening tools to quickly create color transition effects for each of the color channels (FIG. 211):

FIG. 211 Chameleon Image - Fill and Border colors tweened

In fact, the Chameleon images can by used in conjunction with any of the other Tweening tools, depending on what elements (Bitmaps, Icons, Text) make up your button.

Chameleon Images, Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder

Chameleon images can be used in conjunction with custom palettes to create G4 PanelBuilder template files that, when opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application, are capable of switching from one color scheme to another without having to edit the buttons directly. For example, you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design - one color scheme for each design. The Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder allow you to apply different "color skins" to a single template. Since the Fill and Border colors are in turn associated with a particular color palette (which is saved as part of the TPD4 project), the colors used to render the chameleon image will change if and when a different color palette is applied to the template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Chameleon images utilize the 4 color channels that comprise 32-bit PNG images to define separate colorizable regions. Using chameleon images coupled with custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPD4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Chameleon images are imported and applied to buttons (or popup pages) in TPD4. Custom palettes are created in TPD4, and saved as part of the TPD4 project. TPD4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.TPT). However, the primary benefits of these features are realized in the G4 PanelBuilder application (via the Project > Color Schemes feature). Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. In order to utilize Chameleon Images and Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder, the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must utilize at least one chameleon image (meaning that a chameleon image has been applied to at least one button in the project). There are also several requirements for images to allow them to be recognized as chameleon images by TPD4. The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

231

Working With Animation Effects

The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. These preview images are used to display the color options that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements, the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template, and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application, the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click.

232

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

File Transfer Operations

Overview
In TPD4, all file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. While all file transfer operations to touch panels are managed by the Master, the files themselves are routed to the panels, where they will reside (touch panel files never reside on the Master). There are three types of file transfer operations in TPD4 (both accessible via the Transfer menu): Send To Panel: Sends the currently open project (*.TP4) file to a specified Master. Send File To Panel: Sends a selected project file to a specified Master, without opening the file in TPD4. Receive From Panel: Receives a project file from a Master. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself, so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Masters that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog.

Secure NetLinx Connections

If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled, you must enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection, via the User Name and Password fields in the Connection Settings dialog. You can save the User Name/Password combination as part of the communication configuration for that Master. You'll have to be aware of the security settings on the target Master before trying to connect. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.

1. To access the Connection Settings dialog, select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open
the Connect dialog, and select New to create a new communication configuration, or select an existing configuration from the drop-down list and click Properties to edit those saved settings.

2. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 3. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. 4. Once they are entered here, you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the
Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect (FIG. 212).

FIG. 212 Connection Settings dialog (Authentication enabled)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

233

File Transfer Operations

When attempting to connect to a secured NetLinx Master, if the correct User Name/Password combination is not entered (or if the entries are incorrect), the connection will fail and TPD4 will display an error message indicating why the connection was denied. If a User Name/Password is specified for a Master that does not require authentication, they will be ignored. The status bar reflects the status of the connection as follows (FIG. 213):
not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. 213 Connection Status (indicated in the Status Bar)

Working With Communications Configurations

Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations
Connection information is maintained separate from the transfer itself, so it does not need to be established/ dropped each time a transfer is performed. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings (FIG. 214).

FIG. 214 Connect dialog

Anytime you establish a new communication connection configuration (via the New button in the Connect dialog), the program requires you to enter a name for the configuration (in the Name field of the Connection Settings dialog). See the Connecting to a NetLinx Master section on page 235 for details on establishing a new connection. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. The configuration you specify under that name can then be accessed via the Connection drop-down list in the Connect dialog. To recall a saved communication configuration, select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog, and select the desired configuration from the Connection drop-down list (FIG. 215).

FIG. 215 Connect dialog - Connection drop-down list

234

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

To delete a saved configuration, select a configuration (in the Connect dialog) and click the Delete button.

Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration 1. 2. 3. 4.

Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. Select the configuration that you want to edit from the Connection drop-down list. Click the Edit button to invoke the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. 212 on page 233). Edit the communication settings for the selected configuration as needed, and click OK to save your changes and return to the Connect dialog.

Connecting to a NetLinx Master

Typically, file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the panels are connected, as opposed to connecting directly to the panels. Therefore, in order to transfer touch panel files for use on G4compatible panels, you will first establish communication between the PC running TPD4 and the NetLinx Master to which the target panels are connected. The Connect dialog allows you to set up communications, and save multiple connection configurations for easy access. Select Transfer > Connect to access this dialog. There are three possible ways to connect to a NetLinx Master: TCP/IP, Serial or Modem. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog.

Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP

These steps describe establishing TCP/IP communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Once these steps have been completed, you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog.

1. Select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. 2. In the Connect dialog, click New to establish a new connection. The invokes the Connection Settings
dialog (FIG. 212 on page 233).

3. In the Connection Settings dialog, enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you
setting up (in the Name field). This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later, without having to re-configure.

4. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. 216).

FIG. 216 Connection Settings dialog - TCP/IP selected as Transport

5. Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master in the IP Address/DNS Name field. 6. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). Do not change this number. 7. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled, you will prompted to enter a User Name and
Password in order to establish a connection.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

235

File Transfer Operations

Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Once they are entered here, you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.

8. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. 9. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port
These steps describe establishing serial communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Once these steps have been completed, you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog.

1. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. 2. In the Connect dialog, click New to establish a new connection. The invokes the Connection Settings
dialog (FIG. 212 on page 233).

3. In the Connection Settings dialog, enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you
setting up (in the Name field). This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later, without having to re-configure.

4. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. 217).

FIG. 217 Connection Settings dialog - Serial selected as Transport

5. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port, Data Bits, Parity, Baud Rate, Stop Bits and Flow control)
as needed.

6. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled, you will prompted to enter a User Name and
Password in order to establish a connection. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Once they are entered here, you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.

7. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. 8. Press the Connect button to establish the connection.

236

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem

These steps describe establishing modem communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Once these steps have been completed, you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog.

1. In the Connect dialog, click New to establish a new connection. The invokes the Connection Settings
dialog (FIG. 212 on page 233).

2. In the Connection Settings dialog, enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you
setting up (in the Name field). This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later, without having to re-configure.

3. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. 218).

FIG. 218 Connection Settings dialog - Modem selected as Transport

4. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port, Data Bits, Parity, Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Flow control and
Phone #) as needed.

5. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled, you will prompted to enter a User Name and
Password in order to establish a connection. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Once they are entered here, you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.

6. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. 7. Press the Connect button to establish the connection.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

237

File Transfer Operations

Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master

Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master
Select Transfer > Send To Panel (or Transfer > Send File To Panel) to send a panel file to a NetLinx Master with a G4-compatible panel (or panels) on its bus. There are three transport types available to transfer touch panel files: TCP/IP, Serial and Modem. Use the Send File To Panel option to send a project file without having to open it in TPD4. In TPD4, file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels, the panel files are routed to the panels, where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). In order to transfer touch panel files, you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master, via the Connect dialog. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself, so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. To transfer to a G4 panel, verify that the NetLinx Master Firmware is build 85 or later. Verify the TPD4 program being used is Version 1.01 or higher. Earlier versions of the firmware and TPD4 software are incompatible with G4 panels.

Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master

Use the Transfer > Receive From Panel option (or click the toolbar button) to connect to a Master and upload a panel file from a compatible G4 touch panel on that Master's bus. There are three ways to connect and upload Panel files: TCP/IP, Serial and Modem. In TPD4, file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels, the panel files are routed to the panels, where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). In order to transfer touch panel files, you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master, via the Connect dialog. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself, so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings.

Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP

In TPD4, file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels, the panel files are routed to the panels, where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). To use TCP/IP as the transport type:

1. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. If you are not already connected to the Master,
the Connect dialog is invoked (FIG. 214 on page 234). If you have already established a TCP/IP communication configuration, select it from the dropdown list. Otherwise, create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog:

a. In the Name field, enter a name for this communication configuration. This is the name that will b. c. d. e.
appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list. Configure the TCP/IP connection (IP Address/DNS Name of the target/source device). The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). Do not change this number. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog

2. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the TCP/IP connection.

238

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

3. Once communication is established, either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked
(depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu), displaying an online device tree, indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). The online device tree lists the online devices by System #, Device #, Description, (firmware) Version, and Manufacturer. To refresh the Online Devices Tree, disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu.

4. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the
transfer options. See the Transfer Options section on page 241.

5. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer.

If you encounter a transfer error, verify the IP Address, Panel ID, and connection status of both NetLinx Master and Modero panel.

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port

In TPD4, file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels, the panel files are routed to the panels, where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). To use Serial as the transport type:

1. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. If you are not already connected to the Master,
the Connect dialog is invoked. If you have already established a serial communication configuration, select it from the drop-down list. Otherwise, create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog:

a. In the Name field, enter a name for this communication configuration. This is the name that will
appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog.

b. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list. c. Configure the selected serial (COM port) connection (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits and
Flow Control). The suggested settings are: Baud Rate - 38400 Data Bits - 8 Parity - none Stop Bits - 1 Flow Control - none

These settings must match those of the selected COM port.

d. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the serial connection. 3. Once communication is established, either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked
(depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu), displaying an online device tree, indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

239

File Transfer Operations

The online device tree lists the online devices by System #, Device #, Description, (firmware) Version, and Manufacturer. To refresh the Online Devices Tree, disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu.

4. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the
transfer options. See the Transfer Options section on page 241.

5. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. Panel File Transfers via Modem
In TPD4, file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels, the panel files are routed to the panels, where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Note: Modem transfer is the slowest method of transferring TPD4 panel files to the target device. This method can range in speed but on average communicates at 3 Kbps. To use Modem as the transport type:

1. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. If you are not already connected to the Master,
the Connect dialog is invoked. If you have already established a modem communication configuration, select it from the dropdown list. Otherwise, create and save a modem communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog:

a. In the Name field, enter a name for this communication configuration. This is the name that will
appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog.

b. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list. c. Configure the selected modem connection (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits, Flow Control and
Phone Number). The suggested settings are: Baud Rate - 38400 Data Bits - 8 Parity - none Stop Bits - 1 Flow Control - none

These settings must match those of the Modem.

d. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the modem connection. 3. Once communication is established, either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked
(depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu), displaying an online device tree, indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). The online device tree lists the online devices by System #, Device #, Description, (firmware) Version, and Manufacturer. To refresh the Online Devices Tree, disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu.

240

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

4. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the
transfer options. See the Transfer Options section on page 241.

5. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer Transfer Options

Smart transfer (updated panel files only): Select to utilize the Smart Transfer feature, which reduces the transfer time by only replacing those panel files that have been updated (relative to the files already loaded in the panel). Any bitmaps, sound files and fonts that all already resident on the target panel, or in your panel file on your PC (for uploads) are not included in the transfer. Normal transfer (all panel files): This option sends all panel files. Full clean transfer (all panel & system graphic files): Select this option to automatically wipe out any existing project files resident in the target panel before loading the new panel file. If you are simply sending a panel file to a panel, you don't need to use the Full Clean option, since any existing panel files on the target panel will be wiped out anyway. The Full Clean option adds considerable time to the transfer, since it involves sending many more files, and is not necessary in most cases. Open received panel (uploads only): Select this option to automatically open the panel file once it is received. Clear from status queue when complete: This option (enabled by default) clears each transfer from the Transfer Status Window when complete.

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers

TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via TCP/IP, for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. In this situation, you can use your PC's Ethernet connection to connect directly to the panel, using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers, to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP file transfers:

1. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 2. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 3. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers
If it is not already powered up and connected, apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via TCP/IP:

1. On the Touch Panel, press and hold the Setup Access button (on the front panel, below the touch screen)
for 3 seconds to access the Setup page.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Select Ethernet as the Master Connection. Select URL as the Connection Mode. Set the System Number to 0 (zero). Select the Master URL / IP input box and enter the IP address of your PC (displayed in the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

241

File Transfer Operations

9. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the
panel.

10. After several seconds, the panel should appear in the online device tree, listed as Virtual NetLinx
Master. Once you can see the device online, you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master.

Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 1. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). 2. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list.
The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers.

3. Click the Properties button to access the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog, which displays the
Host Name and IP address for your PC.

4. Write down the IP address. a. Enter this IP address as the Master's URL/IP on the System Connection Setup page on the touch
panel. b. Once you have entered the IP address of the PC (acting as a Virtual NetLinx Master), press the Reboot button on the System Connection Setup page to reboot the panel.

5. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. The panel should appear in the list of
Online Devices. Once you can see the panel online, you may transfer the files. To receive files from the panel, select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs.

Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP) 1. Verify that an Ethernet cable is connected from either the rear (NXT models) or side (NXD models) of the
panel to a valid Ethernet Hub.

2. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear/side of
the touch panel.

3. Verify the green Ethernet LED (on the rear Ethernet port) is illuminated (indicating a proper connection).

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection

Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless TCP/IP Transfers, you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master:

Sending Files To the Panel 1. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. 2. Select any Options (Smart Transfer, Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column
of the Transfer Status Window.

242

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

Receiving Files From The Panel 1. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. 2. Select any Options (Smart Transfer, Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status
column of the Transfer Status Window.

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers

TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via USB, for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. In this situation, you can use your PC's USB connection to connect directly to the panel, using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers, to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master USB file transfers:

1. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 2. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 3. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels
After installation of TPD4, please follow the steps below to ensure a valid USB connection to the G4 panels:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Power up the Panel without the USB cable connected to the panel. Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel. You should see an USB icon show up in the System Tray. Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list). Driver button.

5. If the Install Driver dialog doesn't appear automatically, select the Properties button and then the Update 6. When the Install Driver dialog does appear, click on the Next buttons, accepting all the default prompts. 7. The OS will complain about the fact that the driver you are installing/updating does not have a digital
signature. This is acceptable; select to continue the installation. After installation is complete, you are ready to connect to the USB port of the G4 panel. This is done via the Virtual NetLinx Master connection in the Connect dialog (Transfer > Connect).

Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers
If it is not already powered up and connected, apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via USB:

1. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the
Setup page.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Select USB as the Master Connection (this selection causes all other fields in the Master Connection section become read-only). panel.

6. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the 7. After several seconds, the panel should appear in the online device tree, listed as Virtual NetLinx Master.
in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

243

File Transfer Operations

Once you can see the device online, you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master.

Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 1. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). 2. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list.
The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers.

3. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. The panel should appear in the list of
Online Devices. Once you can see the panel online, you may transfer panel files. To receive files from the panel, select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs.

Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB) 1. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear or side
(depending on the model) of the touch panel.

2. Use a (type-A) USB cable to connect the panel to an available USB port on your PC.

First plug the USB cable into the PC, then connect to the panel.

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection

Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless USB Transfers, you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master:

Sending Files To the Panel 1. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. 2. Select any Options (Smart Transfer, Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column
of the Transfer Status Window.

Receiving Files From The Panel 1. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. 2. Select any Options (Smart Transfer, Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status
column of the Transfer Status Window.

244

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

File Transfer Operations

MVP-5200i USB Driver

The MVP-5200i utilizes a native RNDIS USB driver. This driver utilizes Ethernet-over-USB. When the MVP-5200i device is connected to the computer, it should create a new LAN connection (see My Computer | My Network Places | View network connections). It is necessary to supply a static IP address for this LAN connection. To enter a static IP address for the connection, you must edit the properties of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself, via Windows Network Connections settings:

1. Launch the Network Connections dialog (select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications >
Network Connections - FIG. 219).

FIG. 219 Network Connections dialog

2. Right-click on the Network Connection that indicates "AMX USB Device Link", and select Properties
from the context menu. This invokes the Local Area Connection Properties dialog (FIG. 220).

FIG. 220 Local Area Connection Properties dialog

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

245

File Transfer Operations

3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click on Properties. This invokes the Internet Protocol (TCP/
IP) Properties dialog (FIG. 221).

FIG. 221 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog

4. Select Use the following IP address, and enter the desired (static) IP Address and Subnet Mask for the
panel.

5. Click OK to save your changes.

The static IP assigned to this connection should be on the same subnet as the IP address entered on the device Setup Pages (Protected Setup | System Settings | IP Settings | IP Address).

246

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

Working With Templates

Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files
TPD4 allows you to import VisualArchitect (VA) template files (*.VAT) as well as TPD4 template files (*.TPT). *.VAT template files are created and exported using the VisualArchitect application. *.TPT template files are created and saved as templates in TPD4. To import a touch panel template file into TPD4:

1. Select File > Import Touch Panel Template to open the Import Touch Panel Template dialog. 2. Locate and select a Touch Panel Template file (*.VAT or *.TPT) to import into TPD4 for editing.
When a VAT or TPT template file is imported, a Status dialog indicates the progress as the various component files are loaded. Depending on the size of the template, this could take several minutes. Once the template has been loaded, it is opened in TPD4 as a project file. The buttons and pages can be edited, copied and pasted just like any other TPD4 project.

Working With the System Page Template

The System Page Template is a set of pages, popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. When you open the System Page Template, TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder, containing a set of system pages and popup pages (FIG. 222).

FIG. 222 Example System Page Template

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

247

Working With Templates

The System Page template is a resource that you can use to copy/paste entire System Pages into your project, or copy/paste selected elements from a System Page into a page in your project. For example, you may want to include the entire RGB Setup page in your project. Once you copy the System Page into your project, it is treated like any other page in your project. You can edit or modify the page and contained buttons, just like you would for any other page in the Project. Alternatively, you may decide that rather than pasting an entire system page into your project, you only want to use some of the features on a System Page. In this case, you can copy/paste just the buttons you want out of a System Page, and paste them into any page in your project. The System Page Template Pages are all intentionally locked. The pages and the buttons they contain are not editable until they are copied out of the System Page Template folder, and pasted into a Project. Note that the System Page Templates all have names that begin with two underscores (i.e. "__RGBsetup"). When these pages are pasted into a Project, the name is automatically changed to a single underscore (i.e. "_RGB setup"). This is to protect the original System Page Template pages from being edited. TPD4 will not allow you to create and save a page with the two underscore prefix. Again, once the System Page Template is copied into a Project, and the name is (automatically) changed to use a single-underscore prefix, it is fully editable, just like any other page in the Project. Note that if you click on a button on a System Page, the Address and Channel Port/Code assignments work differently than the buttons you create. System Page buttons always use these settings: Address Port: System Page buttons which require communication from the master controller to the panel, are always set to the reserved setup port (0 - setup port) by default. Address Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Address Code for easy identification. Channel Port: Since System Page buttons require communication out of the panel to the master controller, the Channel Port is always set to the reserved setup port (0 - setup port) by default. Channel Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Channel Code for easy identification. The pages that make up the template cannot be modified directly. You can open the System Page Template (via the File menu) and copy entire pages or particular elements from a page, and them paste them into your Project, and once these pages or buttons exist within your Project they can be modified as needed. However, TPD4 treats the System File Template as a password-protected file to avoid accidentally modifying the template pages directly. Keep in mind that if the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace, the Reload last workspace option (in the Application tab of the Preferences dialog) will cause the application to attempt to open the (protected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. Since there is not a password to unlock the file, the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file.

Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project

You can add System Pages to your project by copying and pasting. System Pages and the buttons they contain will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project, since they always retain their function codes. Once the System Page is pasted into your project, you can edit function codes (and all other page and button parameters), if necessary. To copy an entire System Page out of the System Page Template folder and paste it into a project: Select File > System Page Template to open the System Page Template folder as a separate project folder in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). The pages and popup pages included in the System Page Template are displayed in the Pages tab. Note that each System Template page has a descriptive name that begins with two underscores (i.e. "__RGB setup"). The double-underscore prefix indicates that the System Pages are intentionally locked. To avoid potential conflicts with the System Page Template, TPD4 will not allow you to save any Page using the doubleunderscore prefix.

248

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

1. Select the System Page (or pages) that you want to copy (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator). 2. Select Edit > Copy (or use the Copy toolbar button).

You cannot cut a System Page out of the System Page Template.

3. Select the target project and select Edit > Paste (or use the Paste toolbar button). Note that once the
System Page is pasted into the project, the System Page name automatically changes from a double- to a single-underscore prefix (i.e. "_RGBsetup"). This indicates that the page will be treated like a "normal" project page from this point on. Double-click the copied System Page to open it in a Design View window, and edit the page and contained buttons like you would any other page in the project.

Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page

In some cases, you may have a need for a particular element or set of elements in one of the System Page Templates in your project. In addition to copying/pasting entire System Page Template pages into your project, TPD4 allows you to copy/paste specific items from a System Page into an existing page in your project. For example, while you may not necessarily want to include the entire RGBsetup System Page as a page in your project, you may want to use just the Red, Green and Blue Level bargraphs into a page. In this case, you would simply select and copy that set of bargraph buttons from the RGBsetup System Page and paste them right into an existing page in your project. System Page buttons will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project, since they always retain their function codes. Once the System Page button(s) are pasted into your project, you can edit the associated function codes (and all other button parameters), if necessary. The pages in the System Page Template, and the buttons they contain are locked for editing. However, once the copied buttons are pasted into a page in your project, they can be modified just like any other button in the project.

Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads

One of the most helpful features of the System Page Template is the set of keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages it contains. You can use these keyboards and keypads in your Project without having to build the keys or assign the function codes. Simply copy/paste these popup pages into your Project, and they will be fully functional, allowing text/numeric entries on the panel. Like the other System Pages in the System Page Template, these popup pages and their contained buttons are locked to editing, until they are pasted into a Project. Once you bring the keyboard/keypad popup pages into your Project, the popup pages and all of their buttons can be edited just like any other popup pages and buttons in your Project. The System Popup Pages include:
keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard, including Caps Lock, Shift, and International functionality. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard, for text/numeral entries made on the panel.

keyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page, where only asterisks are displayed when you type. keypad: keypadExtend: keypadPrivate: keypadTele: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace, Clear, Abort and Done buttons). Similar to the keypad popup page, but with several additional symbols (-, /, ., :, '). This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page, where only asterisks are displayed when you type. Similar to the keypadExtend popup page, but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols, for use with telephone connections.

Use the keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages anytime you need to add text/numeric entry functions to your Project.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

249

Working With Templates

There are two ways to add a keyboard or keypad to your Project:

1. Copy and Paste the entire Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Select the appropriate
System Template Popup Page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab), select Edit > Copy, then select the target Project in the Workspace Navigator and select Edit > Paste. The pasted popup page is automatically pasted to the Popup Pages folder for the target Project.

2. Copy and Paste only selected elements from a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project:
Open a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page, and copy only the buttons/keys that you plan to use into an existing page in a Project. Either way, you won't have to do any additional work to make the keyboard/keypad work on the panel. However, remember that once pasted into your Project, these popup pages and buttons are fully editable.

System Page Template Reference

The System Page Template is a set of pages, popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. When you open the System Page Template, TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder, containing the following pages. To use these pages in your project, copy/paste the system page (or just those elements that you want to use in your project) into your Project, then enter the text for each button in the States tab of the Properties Control window. System Page Template Reference
Battery: Calibrate: Calibrate Test: Panel: Progress: Project: The Battery Base page allows you to configure various battery and power related options. The elements on this page allow you to reset the vertical and horizontal touch points on the LCD. The elements on this page allow you to confirm that the calibration was done properly. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to the target panel for this Project. This page contains a Progress Bar, used to indicate the progress of file transfer operations. This is the Project Information page. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to your Project (File Name, Version, Revision, Dealer ID, Job Name, etc). This is the Protected Setup page, which contains various setup options that are not usually exposed to the end-user (Device Number, Touch Input Select, Baud Rate, etc). This is the Protected ID page, containing options for various system identification information (IP Settings, Master Connection, Panel Information, etc). This page contains options to allow you change any passwords associated with this Project, including one protected password (which only displays asterisks when the password is being entered for additional security).

Protected:

Protected ID: Protected Password:

Protected Secondary ID: This page contains options to allow you to apply password protection to a secondary (wireless) connection. Protected Sensors: Resolution: Setup: This page contains options to allow you to configure light and motion sensors on the panel. This page allows you to match the outgoing screen resolution on an NXP-TPI/4 to the connected touch panel. The Setup page allows you to set several basic setup options (Panel Timeout, Bus Blink, Panel Volume and Default Panel Sounds - single or double-beep). This page also contains buttons that have page flips to other related System Pages (Project Information, Panel Information, Time Adjustment, Video/RGB Adjustment, Protected Setup). Use the Time page to set the system clock, and to specify how time and date values will be displayed on the panel.

Time:

250

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

System Page Template Reference (Cont.)

RGB Full Screen: This page contains options to allow you to adjust various aspects of the RGB signal (Red, Green and Blue levels, Horizontal and Vertical Size/Position and Tracking). This page also contains a clock adjust button for setting the system clock. This page contains all of the items in the RGB Full Screen System Page, plus buttons to indicate video source slot assignments (which relate to video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4), and several other buttons to allow a return to the Default RGB values, Undo changes, Save Settings, Full Screen Edit, Version and Status text-area buttons. The Video Setup page contains options for setting/adjusting the video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4 (Brightness, Contrast, Saturation and Hue), plus buttons for returning to default settings, undo changes, save changes and other textarea buttons relating to video sources (Version, Status, Input and Format). The options in this page allow you to configure the master volume settings for the panel.

RGB Setup:

Video Setup:

Volume:

System Page Template Popup Pages

The System Page Template also includes several popup pages: Keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard, including Caps Lock, Shift, and International functionality. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard, for text/numeral entries made on the panel. KeyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page, where only asterisks are displayed when you type. Keyboard Virtual: For use with Computer Control buttons to simulate the keyboard on the PC. Keypad: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace, Clear, Abort and Done buttons). KeypadExtend: Similar to the keypad popup page, but with several additional symbols (-, /, ., :, '). KeypadPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page, where only asterisks are displayed when you type. KeypadTele: Similar to the keypadExtend popup page, but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols, for use with telephone connections. Warning Message: This is the Battery Base warning message.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

251

Working With Templates

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template

TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.TPT) file. Select File > Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template to open the Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template dialog. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.TPT) file that will be created from this project. TPD4 does not support the creation of G4 PanelBuilder templates for R-4 remote devices (since R-4 remotes must implement navigation elements in the form of pages in order for the Back and Up/Down buttons on the remote to function correctly). On the other hand, G4 PanelBuilder requires that navigation elements in a template be implemented as pop-ups. The menu option to export a project as a G4 PanelBuilder template will be disabled for R-4 projects. A G4 PanelBuilder template is a TPD4 file complete with pages, popups and buttons, named in a manner that G4 PanelBuilder will understand the relationship between all of the elements. Then, based on the established elements, G4 PanelBuilder customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. Any number of template files (*.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family, it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. The resolutions and panel types are provided here. According to the table there are only 6 resolutions, the minimum number to make a template family, but many more panel types. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400, where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types.

1. You should spend some time deciding what you want the panel to do. What navigation model are you
going to use? You know you're going to have the required template elements but are some of your menus so complex they will require sub-menus? What devices and features will the template include? Consider using some optional template elements. Careful consideration will reveal the type of navigation you will need. Things to remember: You must have a minimum of 1 Navigation element. You must have a minimum of 1 Placeholder element. You must have a main preview image ("[preview].jpg" or "[preview].png"). You cannot create a "drill-down" style of navigation with G4 PanelBuilder. Your navigation menus will always be on top of your Devices. Make sure they do not conflict with each other. Suggestion: Create a simple TPD4 file showing the desired output. Doing this gives you a starting point to begin looking at how to modify the TPD4 file to create a template.

2. You are ready to begin restructuring the elements to fit your needs. Start with the Device and Navigation
elements first and the Placeholder elements last. The key for creating your own elements naming conventions. G4 PanelBuilder looks for navigations with the name, [nav#navName]pageName. Suggestion: Start with the most complex Device element first, then make copies of it. This method allows you to modify and delete thus the pages are more likely to be similar. Also, create several different variations of Navigation and Sub-Navigations (3 items, 4 items, etc...).

3. Create the preview images for the elements. Images do not have to be full size, in fact AMX templates
utilize a 1/4 screen size to reduce the template file size. Suggestion: Mock up the interface in TPD4 by opening the corresponding page and display all applicable popups. Select Page > Copy Image To Clipboard. Then open the resource manager and select Paste. Now rename the new image to the appropriate element name.

252

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

4. After you have completed the template design, do a generate. A .TPT file is created and a list of errors
and warnings are displayed at this time, if applicable.

5. Repeat the design for other resolutions.

Things to remember: You can use TPD4's Save As Other Panel Type when appropriate or as a starting point. Leave the "Job Name" in the Panel Properties the same for all related TPD4 files, this is the basis of a template family. Not all resolutions have to be done at once. If necessary you can build the ones you currently need and address the other resolutions as they present themselves. Below is the workspace for TPD4. The pages are highlighted in the color of the element they represent (FIG. 223).

FIG. 223 TPD4 Workspace - Example G4 PanelBuilder Template

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

253

Working With Templates

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements

When designing a template it is important to remember the rules that govern elements and their relation with the templates. The chart below demonstrates these rules (FIG. 224).

FIG. 224 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements

The template must have at least one of each of the following elements:

Navigation Elements
This is the main menu where most of your navigation selections are made. Consists of at least one popup but can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain any pages Only one can be displayed at a time. Element Specific Conventions: [nav#navName]pageName navName - The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the pages or popups in A Navigation element can contain an Info button. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Navigation element and can contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. buttonName- This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. The popups in the Navigation element must contain at lest one item button that will be filled with navigation information. Item buttons are ordered within the Navigation element in order of left to right then top to bottom. [item]buttonName buttonName - This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. The text will be replaced with the name given to the Navigation in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.

254

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

navName - The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.

Placeholder Elements
This is a blank device element that allows you to represent unique items in the diagram area. Consists of one page and may have optional popups. Only one Placeholder element can be displayed at a time. Element Specific Conventions: [placeholder#placeholderName]pageName placeholderName - The name of the Placeholder element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one page or popup within a Placeholder element can contain an Info button. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Placeholder element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. buttonName - This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. The pages and popups in a Placeholder element can contain one or more Title buttons. The text is replaced with the name given to the Placeholder element in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name will be used in the generated TP4 project.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

255

Working With Templates

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements

There are required elements when developing templates but G4 PanelBuilder also supports a series of optional elements that will make your templates more robust. There are rules that govern all template elements (FIG. 225):

FIG. 225 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements

Your templates can have any of the following:

Mode Elements
This element is generally used for designating "modes" your system will work in, i.e., "Video Conference Mode" or "Presentation Mode." Additionally, Mode elements can be associated with rooms. Consists of a single page and can contain multiple popups. Only one Mode element can be displayed at a time. Element Specific Conventions: [mode#modeName]pageName modeName - The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one page in a Mode element can contain an Info button. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Mode element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. The page in the Mode element must contain at least one Item button that contains the navigation information. Item buttons are ordered within the Mode element by left-to-right then top-to-bottom. [item]buttonName buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

256

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

Popups in a Mode element can contain one or more Title buttons, whose text is replaced with the name given to the Mode in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. modeName - The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

Sub-Navigation Elements
This element is a submenu and can occur on screen with Navigation elements. Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain pages. Element Specific Conventions: [subnav#navName]pageName navName - The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain an Info button, which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Navigation element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Popups in the Sub-Navigation element must contain at least one Item button that will contain navigation information. Item buttons are ordered in the Navigation element left-to-right then top-to-bottom. [item]buttonName buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. The popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. The text within the Title buttons are replaced with the name given to the Sub-Navigation in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. navName - The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

Splash Elements
This element is a popup that can contain an image, i.e., corporate logo. Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain pages. Element Specific Conventions: [splash#splashName]pageName splashName - The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

257

Working With Templates

Only one of the popups in a Splash element can contain an Info button, which contains the page flip information for displaying the Splash element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName - Unused; this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Splash element can contain one or more Title buttons. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Splash element in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. splashName - The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - Unused; this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

Device Elements
This element is the actual device used. For reference, consult AMX templates where we list the most commonly used devices. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. Only one Device element can be displayed at a time. Element Specific Conventions: [device#deviceName]pageName deviceName - The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one page or popup in a Device element can contain an Info button which contains the page flip information for displaying the Device element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Pages and popups in a Device element can contain one or more Title buttons. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Device element in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project. deviceName - The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

Feature Elements
This element resembles the Device element. However, there can only be one Feature element in a panel design, i.e., the "Clean Panel" feature. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. Only one Feature element can be displayed at a time. Element Specific Conventions: [feature#featureName]pageName featureName - The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.

258

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

Only one page or popup in a Feature element can contain an Info button, which contains the page flip information for displaying the Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. The pages and popups in the Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons, whose text is replaced with the name given to the Feature in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. featureName - The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project.

Sub-Feature Elements
This element represents the "universal" features that appear on many pages, i.e., "volume." Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain pages. Element Specific Conventions: [subFeature#subFeatureName]pageName subFeatureName - The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the pages or popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain an Info button, which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons, whose text is replaced with the name given to the Sub-Feature element in the generated TP4 project. [title]buttonName buttonName - The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. subFeatureName - The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName - The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - Unused; the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName - The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project.

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template

In addition to the template requirements and required elements, there are rules for navigating the templates and template wide conventions you need to heed. When navigating to a Device, Feature or Placeholder element from a Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. Show any popups for the element. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature, when applicable. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the element.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

259

Working With Templates

Any Sub-Navigation elements that may have been currently displayed will be hidden.

When navigating to a Device, Feature or Placeholder element from a Sub-Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. Show any popups for the element. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature, when applicable. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the Sub-Navigation element or chain. For Sub-Navigations the user must set "Hide On Action" to No, then show the Sub-Navigation element that is linked to the element. Otherwise, the Sub-Navigation is not shown. Info buttons are optional and only have to be included within an element if the order the popup pages is shown is important, if not all popup pages should be initially shown, or if an icon is used on the corresponding Navigation or Sub-Navigation button. If the Info button is omitted, popup pages are shown in alphabetical order.

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions

Text Replacement - The string "[text]" is required on the button wherever text is to be replaced in the output file. The string "[text]" allows you to prepend/postpend text with characters. If the text on a button to be replaced does not contain '[text]" then it is unchanged. Panel Title - A template can contain as many buttons named "[panelTitle]" as necessary, they are replaced with the "Job Name" of the panel. Preview Images - A template must contain a main preview image and can also contain a preview image for each element. The main preview image should be named '[preview].jpg" (or .png). The element previews should follow the same naming conventions as their page prefixes, i.e., "[device#DVD].jpg." There can only be one preview image per element.

260

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions

AMX urges you to use the following naming convention to allow for portability between templates. Errors could occur if the elements do not match from template to template. G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Convention
Device Names Audio Conference Cable Box Camera Cassette Deck CD Document Camera Door DSS DVD DVR HVAC - Dual HVAC - Single Lift Light Zone Monitor Pool Screen Security Shade Slide Projector Spa Switcher size Radio TV VCR Video Projector Volume - Dual Volume - Single Feature Names US Weather Maps Mode Names Mode X Navigation Names Nav X Example [device#Audio Conference]Audio Conference [device#Cable Box]Cable Box [device#Camera]Camera [device#Cassette Deck]Cassette Deck [device#CD]CD [device#Document Camera]Document Camera [device#Door]Door [device#DSS]DSS [device#DVD]DVD [device#DVR]DVR [device#HVAC - Dual]HVAC - Dual [device#HVAC - Single]HVAC - Single [device#Lift]Lift [device#Light Zone]Light Zone [device#Monitor]Monitor [device#Pool]Pool [device#Screen]Screen [device#Security]Security [device#Shade]Shade [device#Slide Projector]Slide Projector [device#Spa]Spa [device#Switcher size]Switcher size [device#Radio]Radio [device#TV]TV [device#VCR]VCR [device#Video Projector]Video Projector [device#Volume -Dual]Volume - Dual [device#Volume - Single]Volume - Single Example [feature#US Weather Maps]US Weather Maps Example [mode#Mode 3]Mode 3 Example [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 Description [mode#Mode x] x = the number of mode options Description [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 x = the number of navigation options

G4 Computer Control [device#Computer Control]G4CC

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

261

Working With Templates

Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template

TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a VisualArchitect Template (*.VAT) file. Select File > Export As VisualArchitect Template to open the Export As VisualArchitect Template dialog. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the VisualArchitect Template (*.VAT) file that will be created from this project. A VisualArchitect template is a TPD4 file complete with pages, popups and buttons, named in a manner that VisualArchitect will understand the relationship between all of the elements. Then, based on the established elements, VisualArchitect customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. Any number of template files (*.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family, it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. The resolutions and panel types are as follows:
Resolution 640x480 800x600 Panel Type MVP-7500 TPI4 MVP-8400 CA12 CV12 TPI4 800x480 CV7 CV10 CV10/PB 1024x768 CV15 CA15 TPI4 1280x1024 1280x768 TPI4 CV17

According to the table there are only 6 resolutions, the minimum number to make a template family, but 12 different panel types. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400, where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types.

VA Templates - Navigations as Pages

TPD4 modifies the export of panel projects as VisualArchitect templates to allow navigation elements to be implemented as pages instead of popup pages for panel projects of device class "remote". Also, TPD4 limits navigation elements of device class "panel" to pop-up pages only.

VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements

Logical pages contain two button elements that are used to implement a scrollbar. These two buttons are named [scrollbartop] and [scrollbarbottom].

262

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Templates

VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element

Logical pages must contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element that will be used to identify the first page of a logical page group. This button should contain the list of individual logical pages belonging to the logical page collection, starting with itself. A logical page that is itself the only page of a logical page group must still contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element containing at least one page flip (to itself). There should be one and only one [logicalinfobtn] button element for each logical page group. A [logicalinfobtn] button element must be present in addition to a [info] button element that might be required to indicate that the logical page belongs to a device, feature, or placeholder implementation.

VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements

Logical pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement page flips within the logical page group. These two buttons are named [logicalupbtn] and [logicaldownbtn]. Each logical page must contain one of each of these elements.

VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements

List box pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement list box single up/down operations. These two buttons are named [listboxupbtn] and [listboxdownbtn]. Each list box page must contain one of each of these elements.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

263

Working With Templates

264

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Program Preferences
Overview
Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog, where you can set general program preferences for TPD4. This dialog contains four tabs: Application: The items in this tab relate to Startup, Undo/Redo Support and Miscellaneous program settings. Appearance: The items in this tab relate to the Design View window. "Directories: The items in this tab allow you to specify default directories for Panel files, Backup copies and the image library directory. Editor Selection: The items in this tab allow you associate external editing programs with image and sound files that can be accessed through TPD4.

Use the Customize dialog to customize the TPD4 GUI.

Preferences Dialog - Application tab

FIG. 226 shows the Application tab of the Preferences dialog:

FIG. 226 Preferences Dialog - Application tab

The items in the Application tab include:

Startup
Prompt for system generated name: This option will default the checkbox for system generated filenames (in the New Project Wizard) to the checked position. With this option unchecked, system generated filenames are not generated, although the data that makes them up is still saved. Reload last workspace: This option will reopen the last panel file and the pages (including popup pages) that were open when the application was closed (assuming that a panel file was open when the application was closed).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

265

Program Preferences

If the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace, the Reload last workspace option will cause the application to attempt to open the (passwordprotected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. Since there is not a password to unlock the file, by design the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. Expand Workspace Navigator: This option will expand the tree structure (in the Workspace Navigator - Pages tab) on application startup. Note that this option does not take effect immediately on pressing Apply, but will take effect the next time you open a project file.

Miscellaneous
Flush Closed Pages on Save: When enabled, this option flushes system memory of any pages that were previously opened but now closed, when the project is saved successfully (default = enabled). Create backup copy: This option saves a backup copy of the panel file to the backup folder every time you perform a save operation. Use "Copy of" prefixes: This option automatically adds the prefix "Copy of" to any pasted pages and popup pages, if a name conflict occurs. With this option unchecked, the user will be asked to resolve the name conflict. Retain selected tool: This option locks the selected tool (Selection Tool or Button Draw Tool). With this option unchecked, the tool is reverted to the Selection Tool at the completion of every button draw operation. Image Cache Size (MB): Use the up and down arrows to adjust the size of the image cache (default = 8 MB). The image cache size value specifies the amount of memory allocated for images used in displaying buttons (in the Design View, State Manager, and Button Preview). If an image is not found in the in-memory cache, it must be loaded again from disc, which is a much slower operation. Increase the cache size to keep more images in memory (potentially, depending on their size) to speed up loading and displaying those images.

Warning Messages
When deleting resources in use: Click to receive a warning from TPD4 when you attempt to delete resources that are currently being used by the open project. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Click Apply to apply any changes. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog, without saving any changes.

266

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab

FIG. 227 shows the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog:

FIG. 227 Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab

The items in the Appearance tab include:

Window
Initial Zoom: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of the zoom settings that can be applied as the default initial zoom setting for all new Design View windows. This setting does not affect the zoom setting for pages that are already open. You can also manually set the zoom factor on any page or popup page by selecting the page and using the Zoom Toolbar, where you can either use the zoom in and out icons to zoom in/out (in 25% increments), or select the zoom setting (including Fit Page, Fit Width, Fit Height) from the drop-down list. Once of the Initial Zoom options is called Actual Size. Because there are variations in dots per inch measurements among panels and among computer monitors, this option allows you to see how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the panel. To use this option, you must first specify their monitor's visible size (in the Monitor Size field - see below). This number should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a fullscreen image, as opposed to the monitor's overall diagonal size. For example, most 21" monitors typically have between a 19.5" and 20" viewable area. Monitor Size: Use this field to specify the size of the visible portion of the monitor that your pages will actually be displayed on (see Initial Zoom and Note above). Gutter Color: The Gutter is the area around the outer edge of the Design View windows. Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the gutter on all new Design View windows. Auto Stack New Windows: This setting causes all page windows to stack directly on top of the last active (selected) page window. Use this option if you are working on a resolution or zoom setting that takes up most or all of your screen area, and you want to work with multiple pages without cascading them (which could result in part of the page window being outside of the viewable area). Default = enabled.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

267

Program Preferences

The Auto Stack and Initial Zoom settings are retained the next time you launch the program.

Grid
Grid Style: Select from the drop-down list of styles that the grid can be displayed in (Line, Dashed Line or Dots). Grid Size: Use the up/down arrows to set the default grid size (measured in pixels). The range is 4 - 255, the default setting is 8. Snap Tolerance: Use the up/down arrows to specify the snap tolerance for the grid. The snap tolerance represents the number of pixels within which objects in the Design View window will "snap" to the nearest grid line (applicable only when the Snap To Grid option is enabled, via the Button Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar). Grid Color: Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the grid (if enabled) on all new Design View windows.

Transparency
Transparent colors in TPDesign4 are represented by a checkerboard pattern. This set of options allow you to modify the way that the transparency checkerboard appears. In certain situations, changing the checkerboard style to different sizes, shades and/or colors can facilitate viewing and working with graphics. The Transparency checkerboard is visible on pages and popup pages that are transparent, in the State Manager when a state is transparent, and in the Button Preview when a state is transparent. Style: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard styles that can be used to represent transparency. The options are Light, Medium, Dark and Custom. If Custom is selected, the Custom Colors option is enabled (see below). Size: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard sizes. The options are Tiny, Small, Medium and Large. Custom Colors: If Custom was selected as the Style (see above), then you can specify a custom color combination for the checkerboard by selecting from these two drop-down lists. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Click Apply to apply any changes. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog, without saving any changes.

268

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab

FIG. 228 shows the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog:

FIG. 228 Preferences Dialog - Directories tab

The items in the Directories tab include:

Default Directories
Panels: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all Panel (or project) files (*.TP4). Click the browse button (...) to open the Browse For Folder dialog, where you can navigate to an alternative folder. Backup copies: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all *.TP4 Backup files. Click the browse button (...) to open the Browse For Folder dialog, where you can navigate to an alternative folder. Temp folder location: Use this field to set the location of the folder TPD4 uses for any temp files. This feature accommodates the potential for large projects which need an especially large amount of temporary disk space. If you either have a panel open or a transfer in progress the Temp Folder Location field is disabled. In these situations the Temp folder cannot be changed since it is being actively used. This field is re-enabled once all panels are closed and transfers are completed. Reset: Click to reset all options in the Directories tab to their default settings. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Click Apply to apply any changes. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog, without saving any changes.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

269

Program Preferences

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab

FIG. 229 shows the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog:

FIG. 229 Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab

The options in the Editor Selection tab allow you to associate external programs of your choice with image and sound files, to accommodate in-place editing of the images and sounds used in your Project. Once you have associated an external program to image and/or sound editor, you can edit image and files by selecting the file in either the Images or Sounds tab of the Resource Manager and clicking the Edit button. The items in the Editor Selection tab include: Editor Type menu - Click the down arrow to select either Image Editors or Sound Editors from the drop-down list. Add Editor button - Click to add either an image or a sound editing program to the Editors list (depending on the Editor Type selected). Remove Editor button - With an editor selected (in the Editors list), click this button to remove it from the list, and disassociate it from image or sound files in TPD4. Editors table - Lists all external image or sound editing programs (depending on the Editor Type selected) that have been added, by filename (*.EXE and file path. The Default column indicates which of the programs is currently set as the default editor.

270

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab

FIG. 230 shows the Undo/Redo tab of the Preferences dialog:

FIG. 230 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab

The items in the Undo/Redo tab include:

Undo / Redo Support

Enable the Undo system: This option enables/disables the ability to undo actions. By default, this option is selected. Pressing OK or Accept after enabling/disabling the undo system will result in a clearing of the undo/redo history. Number of Undo Levels: Use the up/down arrows to change the number of undo actions allowed (default = 500). Show affected pages on Undo: With this option enabled, the program will always display the page(s) affected by an undo operation, even they have been closed since that action was performed. For example, if you changed a button property on a button that exists on a page that has been closed, that page will automatically be reopened to show the button that was affected at the point that the Undo is performed. Change selection on Undo: When enabled, this option will automatically change the selection so that the item(s) affected by the Undo / Redo action are selected. Enable the Redo system: This option enables/disables the ability to redo actions. By default, this option is selected. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Click Apply to apply any changes. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog, without saving any changes.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

271

Program Preferences

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files

Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files, but one is specified as the default image editor:

1. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog, and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. 231).

FIG. 231 Preferences dialog - Editor Selection tab

Note that Image Editors is already selected in the Editor Type drop-down menu.

2. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. 3. Click the Browse button (...) to locate and select the desired program's executable (.EXE) file, in the
Open dialog. The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. If you add additional programs to the list, you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor.

4. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list.

Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files

Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files, but one is specified as the default image editor:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog, and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. 231). Click the down arrow and select Sound Editors from the Editor Type drop-down menu. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. Click the Browse button (...) to locate and select the desired program's executable (.EXE) file, in the Open dialog.

272

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

FIG. 232 Preferences dialog - Editor Selection tab

The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. If you add additional programs to the list, you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor.

5. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list.

Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program

You can change the default image or sound editor program via the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog:

1. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog, and open the Editor Selection tab. 2. Select the Editor Type that you want to change the default program for (Image Editors or Sound Editors)
from the drop-down menu. This selection populates the Editors table with a listing of all editing programs that have been added. The Default column indicates which program is the current default (TRUE = current default).

3. Double-click on any program in the list (other than the current default) to access the Choose Editor
dialog.

4. Check the Default Editor checkbox to set the selected program as the default editor (FIG. 233).

FIG. 233 Choose Editor dialog (Default Editor option selected)

5. Click OK to close the Choose Editor dialog.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

273

Program Preferences

The new default editor is indicated in the Default column of the Editors table (FIG. 234).

FIG. 234 Default Editor Indicated In the Default Column of the Editors Table

Customizing the Menus and Toolbars

Use the options in the Command tab of the Customize dialog to customize the contents of the TPD4 toolbars and menus (FIG. 235).

FIG. 235 Customize dialog - Command tab

Customizing the Toolbars

Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars 1. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize), to the Commands tab. 2. Select a command category (under Categories). The commands included in the selected category are
displayed (under Commands), along with their associated toolbar icon, if one exists. Alternatively, select All Commands to view a full list of all commands, regardless of category.

3. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). 4. While holding the mouse-button down, drag the command/icon to a toolbar.
Note that the cursor symbol indicates that it is not allowed to be placed anywhere except inside the area of a toolbar (any toolbar).

5. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the toolbar, and release the mouse button. 6. The command/icon is placed as a button in the toolbar.

274

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars 1. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 2. Click to select a toolbar button from an existing toolbar. 3. While holding the mouse button down, drag the button to any area outside of a toolbar. Note that the
cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the button is dragged outside of the toolbars.

4. Release the mouse button to delete the button from the toolbar.
Alternatively, as long as the Customize dialog is open, you can simply right-click on any button to open the New Command context menu. Select Delete to delete the button.

Associating an Icon With a New Command

Once you have added a new command to a Toolbar or Menu, you can associate an icon with the command:

1. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 2. For toolbar buttons, right-click on the select the button that you want to associate an icon with to open the
context menu. For menu items, right-click on a menu item (FIG. 236).

FIG. 236 Customizing menu items

3. Select Button Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog (FIG. 237).

FIG. 237 Button Appearance dialog

4. In the Button Appearance dialog, select Image Only or Image and Text (the Text Only option does not
allow you to associate an icon).

5. Select an icon from the User-Defined Image field. 6. Click OK.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

275

Program Preferences

Creating a New Custom Toolbar 1. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. 238).

FIG. 238 Customize dialog - Toolbars tab

2. Click the New button. This opens the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. 239).

FIG. 239 Toolbar Name dialog

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Enter a name for the new toolbar in the text field and click OK. The new toolbar name appears in the Toolbars list, along with an empty new toolbar icon. Click and drag to move the new toolbar icon into position, in an empty area near the other toolbars. With the empty toolbar in place, open the Commands tab of the Customize dialog. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a list of commands (under Commands). Click and drag commands from the Commands list and drop them inside the area of the new toolbar. Repeat this process to add as many commands as you like to your custom toolbar(s) (FIG. 240).

FIG. 240 Dragging a Command From the Commands List Into the New Toolbar

Renaming Custom Toolbars 1. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. 238 on page 276). 2. Select the toolbar you want to rename from the list, and click Rename to open the Toolbar Name dialog
(FIG. 239).

3. Enter the new name in the Toolbar Name text field and click OK to save the change.

276

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Deleting Custom Toolbars

To delete custom (user-added) toolbars from the TPD4 workspace:

1. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab. 2. Click to select a custom toolbar. 3. Click Delete to permanently delete the selected toolbar.

The standard TPD4 toolbars cannot be deleted.

Customizing the Menus

Adding Commands To Existing Menus 1. Open the Customize dialog, to the Commands tab (FIG. 235 on page 274). 2. Open the menu to which you want to add a command. 3. Select a command category (under Categories). The commands included in the selected category are
displayed (under Commands), along with their associated toolbar icon, if one exists. Alternatively, select All Commands to view a full list of all commands, regardless of category (FIG. 241).

FIG. 241 Customize dialog - Adding Commands To Existing Menus

4. 5. 6. 7.

Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). While holding the mouse-button down, drag the command/icon to the open menu. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the menu, and release the mouse button. The command/icon is placed as a new option in the menu.

Removing Commands From Existing Menus 1. Open the Customize dialog. 2. Click to select a menu item from an existing menu. 3. While holding the mouse button down, drag the menu item to any area outside of a menu. Note that the
cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the menu item is dragged outside of the menus.

4. Release the mouse button to delete the item from the menu.
Alternatively, as long as the Customize dialog is open, you can simply right-click on any menu item to open the Command context menu. Select Delete to delete the button.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

277

Program Preferences

Creating a New Custom Menu 1. Open the Customize dialog, to the Commands tab (FIG. 235 on page 274). 2. Select New Menu from the Categories list. This places the "New Menu" entry in the Commands list
(FIG. 242).

FIG. 242 Customize dialog - Creating a New Custom Menu

This item represents a new "empty" menu.

3. While holding the mouse button down, drag the New Menu icon to a location within the Menu Bar
(FIG. 243).

FIG. 243 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar

4. Release the mouse button to create the new (empty) menu at the cursor location (FIG. 244).

FIG. 244 Creating the New (Empty) Menu At the Cursor Location

5. To name the new menu, right-click on the menu to open the New Command context menu, and select
Button Appearance. This opens the Button Appearance dialog. Type the name for the new menu in the Button Text field and press OK.

6. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a set of commands (under Commands). 7. Add commands to the new menu by clicking and dragging commands from the Commands list to the new
menu (FIG. 245).

FIG. 245 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar

8. Release the mouse button to place the selected command in the new menu.

278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu

Use the options in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog to add/remove shortcuts to external applications in the Tools menu:

1. Open the Customize dialog to the Tools tab (FIG. 246).

New (Insert) button

FIG. 246 Customize dialog - Toolbars tab

2. Click the New (Insert) button to create an empty text field in the Menu Contents list. 3. Enter a name for the application, as you want it to appear in the Tools menu. 4. Next to the Command field, click the browse button (...) to locate and select the application's.EXE file in
the Open dialog. The directory path is displayed in the Command text box.

5. Specify any Arguments, if necessary. 6. Specify an Initial Directory, if necessary. 7. Click Close to close the Customize dialog.
The new shortcut should appear at the bottom of the Tools menu.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

279

Program Preferences

Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators)

Hotkeys, sometimes referred to as "Keyboard Accelerators" (such as CTRL+C for the "Copy" command) can be customized in TPD4. You can view all of the current hotkey assignments in the Help Keyboard dialog (Help > Keyboard Map). The information in this dialog is read-only.

Setting Custom Hotkeys

Use the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog to create new Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators), or to modify existing ones (FIG. 247):

FIG. 247 Customize dialog - Keyboard tab

1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the Customize dialog, to the Keyboard tab. Choose a command category in the Category drop-down menu. Choose a command in the Commands list. Enter the new Hotkeys) in the Select New Shortcut Key field.

If you assign the minus key (-), always use the number pad on your keyboard, as opposed to the minus key in the main key set.

5. Click Assign to assign the key(s) to the selected menu item.

To remove a hotkey assignment, select the command in the Commands list, then highlight the command's hotkey assignment in the Current Keys list, and click Remove. To reset all hotkey assignments to their default settings, click Reset All. Multiple hotkeys can be assigned to the same command, but only the first one will be displayed next to the item in the menu after this type of change.

280

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Program Preferences

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

281

Its Your World - Take Control

3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX 75082 USA 800.222.0193 469.624.8000 469-624-7153 fax 800.932.6993 technical support www.amx.com

9/09 2009 AMX. All rights reserved. AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.